u.s. general services administration new england region ... · division 23 - heating, ventilating,...

47A York Street Portland, ME 04101

(207) 553-7753

Coburn Gore LPOE

Vehicle Search Bay Renovation

U.S. General Services Administration New England Region (Region 1)

North Service Center (1PSK)

A/E Contract No. GS-01P-14-BWD-0025

PDN No. EP-GS-P-01-17-BW-0014

Specifications – BID SET August 1, 2018

Prepared for:

General Services Administration

New England Region

10 Causeway Street

Boston, MA 02222

PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT. COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS AND/OR DOCUMENTS

WITHOUT THE EXPLICIT PERMISSION OF THE U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION IS PROHIBITED. DISTRIBUTION TO THOSE WITH OTHER THAN A NEED TO KNOW IS STRICTLY

FORBIDDEN.

COBURN GORE LPOE AUGUST 1, 2018 VEHICLE SEARCH BAY RENOVATION BID SET

Division Section Title Pages

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010400 PROJECT COORDINATION 9 010450 CUTTING AND PATCHING 4 010900 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 14 011000 SUMMARY 3 013000 SUBMITTALS 5 013100 SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 3 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 8 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 015050 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 7 015150 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT 7 015410 SECURITY REGULATIONS 9 015460 SAFETY AND HEALTH 5 016320 PRODUCTS 5 016350 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 2 017000 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 6 017001 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 6 017350 FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK 3

Facility Construction Subgroup

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 5

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 4 072500 WEATHER BARRIERS 3 073113 ASPHALT SHINGLES 8 074633 PLASTIC SIDING 4 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 6 078443 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 5 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 4

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 10 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 13


DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 8 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 4 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 6

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 9

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 5 231126 FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING 17 233113 METAL DUCTS 8 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 5 235523.13 LOW-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS 4

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 262726 WIRING DEVICES 5 265116 INTERIOR LIGHTING 8

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280000 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 40

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS


PROJECT COORDINATION 010400 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 010400 - PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section specifies general administrative procedures and performance required, including but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Coordination and meetings. 2. Administrative/supervisory personnel. 3. Surveys and records or reports. 4. Limitations for use of site. 5. Special reports. 6. Tradespeople and workmanship standards. 7. Inspections, tests and reports. 8. General installation provisions. 9. Cutting and patching. 10. Cleaning and protection. 11. Energy Conservation. 12. Environmental Protection. 13. Overtime work, suspension of work.

1.2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS

A. General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work at project site, a written

memorandum of instructions on required coordination activities, including required notices, reports and attendance at meetings. Prepare similar memorandum for separate contractors where interfacing of work is required.

B. Coordination drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and

Schedules," of "Contract Clauses," for general requirements.

1. Work by Separate Entities: Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to produce required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. Comply with submittal requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittals."

2. Sleeves and Inserts: Before any sleeves or inserts are set or any mechanical or electrical equipment or foundations or other work is installed, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval by the Contracting Officer composite coordination drawings for all equipment rooms, spaces and other areas in which work of two or more trades or subcontractors is to be installed and in which the probability of interference exists, as determined by either the Contractor or the Contracting Officer. Drawings shall show the work of all trades covered, shall be drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/2" = 1'-0", and shall show clearly in both plan and elevation that all work can be installed without interference.



3. Work installed without prior approval: Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interferences shall be made without additional expense to the Government. In case interference develops, the Contracting Officer will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.

C. Coordination of Trades: Coordinate work of different trades so that interference between

mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided and within limits indicated the maximum practical space for operation, repair, removal, and testing of equipment is provided. Keep pipes, ducts, conduit, and the like as close as possible to ceiling slab, walls, and columns to take up a minimum amount of space. Locate pipes, ducts, and equipment so that they do not interfere with the intended use of eyebolts and other lifting devices.

D. Preconstruction Meeting: The Government will conduct a meeting to discuss administrative

procedures with the contractor which will be scheduled to occur between the Contract Award an the Notice to Proceed. See Division 01 Section "Safety and Health" for requirements of preconstruction safety meeting.

E. Monthly Coordination Meeting: In addition to specific preinstallation meetings and

coordination meetings for each major element of work, and regular project meetings for other purposes (as indicated elsewhere in contract documents), hold monthly general project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times which are convenient for everyone involved. Request representation (at each meeting) by every entity currently involved in coordination or planning for work of the entire project. Conduct meetings in a manner which will resolve coordination problems. Record results of meetings and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory

personnel required for performance of the work, provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein.

B. Environmental Control Officer: The Contractor shall designate an "Environmental Control

Officer" whose duties shall include the responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection provisions of these specifications including safety and health; the requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act; and other applicable Federal, state and local standards. As outlined in the applicable sections of this specification, submit for approval by the Contracting Officer the proposed traffic flow plan, security plan, program for temporary structures, housecleaning plan, erosion control plan, demolition program, and safety and health plan. After approval by the Contracting Officer, the implementation and enforcement of these programs shall become the responsibility of the Environmental Control Officer. Any changes in the programs must be requested by the Contractor through the Environmental Control Officer for written concurrence by the Contracting Officer.

C. Energy Conservation Officer: The Contractor shall designate an "Energy Conservation Officer"

whose duties shall consist of developing and implementing a program for minimizing the use of



energy on the site. He shall develop an energy conservation plan, which is subject to approval of the Contracting Officer. The Contractor may designate the same person, or different persons, as "Environmental Control Officer," and "Energy Conservation Officer."

D. Project Coordinator: Provide a full-time Project Coordinator, who is experienced in

administration and supervision of building construction including mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between units of work. For purpose of this provision, "interface" is defined to include the scheduling and sequencing of work, sharing of access to work spaces, installations, protection of each other's work, cutting and patching, tolerances, cleaning, selections for compatibility, preparation of coordination drawings, inspections, tests, and temporary facilities and services.

E. Submittal of Staff Names, Duties: Within 15 days of contract date, submit a listing of

Contractor's principal staff assignments and consultants, naming persons and listing their addresses and telephone numbers.

1.4 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE

A. General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by other contract documents, administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing access and space, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

B. Use of Equipment by Government: See clause of same title in the General Conditions.

C. Archaeological Rights: There is a possibility that items of archaeological significance may be

found during work at the site. In such event, stop work in the vicinity of the find and notify the Contracting Officer immediately; subsequent work shall proceed as directed by the Contracting Officer. All items found which are considered to have archaeological significance are the property of the Government.

D. Ceremonies: Subject to mutually satisfactory arrangements between the parties of the contract,

the Government may enter the premises during the term of the contract to conduct ceremonies, such as laying the cornerstone or dedication ceremonies, and to occupy temporarily such portions of the premises as may be necessary.

E. Parking Facilities: Except as noted or specified and within the project site, and except for one

Contractor vehicle, there will be no parking available at site during normal working hours. The Contractor and his employees shall make their own arrangements for vehicle parking.

F. Materials on the Site: Unless otherwise noted or specified, materials and equipment that are

removed and not reused under this contract become the property of the Contractor, and salvage value shall be reflected in the bid.

G. Storage or Sale of Equipment on Site: Storage or sale of excess salvageable material on the site

is not permitted. Remove from site.



1.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports to the Contracting Officer

within one day of occurrence requiring special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence.

B. Reporting Accidents: Refer to Division 01 Section "Safety and Health."

C. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site

(examples: visit by news media; extraordinary weather phenomenon), prepare and submit a special report listing chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance, advise the Contracting Officer in advance at earliest possible date.

1.6 TRADESPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at site are

skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality- levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement.

B. Availability of Tradespersons: At each progress or coordination meeting, review availability of

tradespersons and projected needs to accomplish work as scheduled. Require each entity employing personnel to report on events which might affect progress of work. Where possible, consider alternatives and take actions to avoid disputes and delays.

1.7 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS

A. General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of

probable compliances of work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Specified inspections and tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable access to agencies performing tests and inspections.

1. Government Tests: Where tests or inspections are indicated as Government's

responsibility, Government will engage independent testing agency to perform required services.

B. Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated and except where

manufacturer's testing facilities are indicated as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories specializing in required services and acceptable to the Contracting Officer.

C. Reports: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

1.8 OVERTIME WORK, SUSPENSION OF WORK



A. Overtime Work for Utility Shutdown:

1. Work which requires the shutdown of any utility serving the building shall be performed outside of normal working hours of the building occupants.

2. Schedule shutdown of a utility at least 48 hours in advance with the Contracting Officer or her designated representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Where preinstallation conferences are specified in technical sections, well in advance of installation meet at project site with installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration with other work which has preceded or will follow. Advise the Contracting Officer of scheduled meeting dates. At each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for particular work under consideration, including requirements of contract documents, options, related change orders, purchases, deliveries, shop drawings, product data; quality control samples, possible conflicts, compatibility problems, time schedules, weather limitations, temporary facilities, space and access limitations, structural limitations, governing regulations, safety, inspection and testing requirements, required performance results, recording requirements, and protection. Record significant discussions of each conference, and record agreements and disagreements, along with final plan of action. Distribute record of meeting promptly to everyone concerned.

1. Do not proceed with the work if associated preinstallation conference cannot be

concluded successfully. Instigate actions to resolve impediments to performance of the work, and reconvene conference at earliest date feasible.

B. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect

substrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to report (in writing to Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with

manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent these are more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in contract documents.

D. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject

damaged and defective items.

E. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from noncompatible work, as required



to prevent deterioration.

F. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.

G. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units of work

at industry-recognized standard mounting heights for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to the Contracting Officer for final decision.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Do not cut-and-patch structural work in a manner resulting in reduction of load-

carrying capacity or load/deflection ratio; submit proposed cutting and patching to the Contracting Officer for structural approval before proceeding. Do not cut-and-patch operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in reduction of capacities to perform in manner intended or resulting in decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.

1.Engage original Fabricator/Installer to perform cutting- and-patching of structural work, operational/safety- related components, and visually-exposed work; or, if not available, engage only recognized experts; employ only proven methods.

B. Materials: Except as otherwise indicated or approved by the Contracting Officer, provide

materials for cutting-and- patching which will result in equal-or-better work than work being cut-and-patched; in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Use materials identical with original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby.

C. Temporary Support and Protection: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut, to

prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting-and-patching, to prevent damage; and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure.

D. Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining.

E. Patch with methods which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances for the work.

F. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coats.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site clean and protect work in

progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or



deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessarily through remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

B. Limiting Exposures of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection

methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include (where applicable, but not by way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper shipping/ handling, theft and vandalism.

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Soil Disposal and/or Borrow: Dispose of excess soil and/or obtain borrow only at locations

shown on drawings. Conduct all soil disposal and/or borrow work in accordance with requirements of local regulatory authorities.

B. Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Contaminants: Contractor shall be responsible for the proper

disposal of all solid, liquid, and gaseous contaminants in accordance with all local codes and regulations, together with the following requirements:

1. Discharge gaseous contaminants so that they will be sufficiently diluted with fresh air to

reduce the toxicity to an acceptable level.

2. Liquid contaminants may, subject to local utility standards, be diluted with water to a level of quality acceptable in the local sewer system, or shall be contained in approved vessels for disposal at approved sites.

C. Disposal of Refuse: Remove refuse resulting from construction operations from the site, except

where State or local requirements permit burning on the site. If State and local requirements permit burning on the site, provide the Contracting Officer a copy of State and/or local permit or license reflecting the State or local approval.

D. Trucking:

1. Load all trucks leaving the site with earthen materials or loose debris in a manner that

will prevent dropping of materials on streets. Fasten suitable tarpaulins over the load before they enter surrounding paved streets. Trucks bringing earthen materials over paved streets to the site shall be similarly loaded and covered.

2. At all points where trucks will leave the site and enter surrounding paved streets, maintain a suitable truck wheel washing installation and crew to prevent any mud from being carried onto such adjacent paved streets. All trucks, or other vehicles leaving the site at any time shall be hosed and washed clean of mud and dirt clinging to wheels and



exterior body surfaces. Installation shall be provided with a concrete or macadam slab, arranged to assure adequate drainage to prevent puddling. Keep washdown area clean.

3. The Contractor and all subcontractors on or delivering to the site shall conform to all local regulations regarding load limits.

E. Construction Site Maintenance:

1. Store all supplies and equipment on project site so as to preclude mechanical and climatic

damage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly manner. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temporary structures and construction

enclosure (fence) in good repair and visually pleasant. He shall further provide adequate security to prevent the presence of unauthorized persons on the site, and to keep gates secured when not in actual use to insure the integrity of the barrier as well as for property security.

F. Noise Control:

1. Comply with all applicable state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations relative to

noise control. 2. Equipment to be employed on this site shall not produce a noise level exceeding the

following limits in Db(A) at a distance of 50 feet from the equipment under test. 3. Equipment:

a. Earthmoving

1) front loader 79 2) truck 91

b. Materials Handling

1) concrete mixer 85 2) concrete pump 82

c. Stationary

1) pumps 76 2) generators 78 3) compressors 81

d. Impact

1) pneumatic tools 86

e. Other

1) saws 78 2) vibrators 76



3.5 ENERGY CONSERVATION

A. The plan developed by the Energy Conservation Officer and approved by the Contracting Officer shall be adhered to in the execution of the work. Post copies of the plan in conspicuous locations so that all personnel employed on the project may be made aware of the need to conserve energy at all times.

END OF SECTION 010400


CUTTING AND PATCHING 010450 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 010450 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for

access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar purposes.

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be "cutting and patching."

3. "Demolition" and "Selective Demolition" are recognized as related-but-separate categories of work, which may or may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section; refer to "Selective Demolition" section of Division 02.

B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and

limitations applicable to individual units of work.

1. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. Refer to Division 21 - 28 sections for additional requirements and limitations on cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that

would result in a reduction of load-carrying capacity or of 1oad-deflection ratio. Prior to such work, obtain approval of project's structural engineer.

B. Before cutting and patching the following categories of work, obtain the Contracting Officer's

approval to proceed.

1. Structural steel. 2. Miscellaneous structural metals, including lintels, equipment supports, stair systems and

similar categories of work. 3. Structural concrete. 4. Foundation construction.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in its

occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Contracting Officer's opinion, result in



lessening the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Contracting Officer to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished work, patch and

repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces. Where new work is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface and shall match the existing adjacent surface texture and finish as closely as possible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with the requirements of the Construction Contract Clauses, Division

01 Section "Submittals" and the individual sections specifying the work.

B. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal:

1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and

patching cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements.

2. List products to be used and firms including their qualifications, that will perform work. 3. Give dates when work is expected to be performed. 4. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by work, including those that

will be relocated and those that will be out-of-service temporarily. Indicate how long utility service will be disrupted.

5. When cutting, modifying, and patching of structural work is required to facilitate the installation of work required in this contract, notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Do not cut or modify the structural element without written instructions from the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall follow the Contracting Officer’s direction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Contracting Officer, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal-or-better performance characteristics.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, notify the Contracting Officer. Corrective action shall be taken before proceeding with the work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: To prevent failure provide temporary support of work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide

protection from adverse weather conditions of that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

1. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining

areas.

C. Take precaution not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise

indicated or as approved by the Contracting Officer, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete work without delay.

B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or

adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer's recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing

or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole.

2. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

3. Comply with requirements of other applicable sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling.

4. Comply with OSHA Lock-Out Tag-Out (LOTO) requirements prior to removal, modification or replacement of existing utility services such as pipe or conduit. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. ASSURE THAT CONDUITS HAVE BEEN DE- ENERGIZED PRIOR TO CUTTING. ASSURE THAT GAS, WATER AND OTHER UTITILITY SERVICES HAVE LIKEWISE BEEN SHUT OFF PRIOR TO CUTTING SUCH SERVICES. Cut-off conduit and pipe in walls or partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign



matter.

C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends from one finished area into another finished area, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials.

a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over

entire unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coat.

4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of

uniform appearance. 5. Concrete slab patching, where utilities are indicated below interior and exterior on-grade

concrete slabs, shall be accomplished by saw-cutting the existing slab, excavate to necessary depth, fill with compacted granular fill, and provide new concrete slab of the same thickness as the existing slab. Finish the new slab to match the existing adjacent surface.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work.

Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature which are not part of the final patch or refinished surface. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied in accordance with other trade sections. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. DO NOT DISTURB ASBESTOS- CONTAINING PIPE COVERING OR OTHER ASSUMED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS. Notify the Contracting Officer of the condition.



DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 010900 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 010900 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS:

A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language consists of definitions of

terms found in other contract documents, including drawings. (Drawings are recognized as being diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon). Certain terms used in contract documents are defined in this article. Definitions and explanations contained in this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of contract documents.

B. Special Conditions: Wherever the term "Special Conditions" or "Section, Special Conditions" is

used in the specifications, it refers collectively to all of the sections in Division 1, General Requirements and the Contract Clauses.

C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross-reference to graphic representations, notes or

schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in contract documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for purpose of helping reader locate cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

D. Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested",

"authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by the Contracting Officer", "requested by the Contracting Officer", and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Contracting Officer's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision.

E. Approve: Only the Contracting Officer, or an individual designated by her in writing, can

approve or disapprove contract actions. Even if the specifications indicate that an individual other than the Contracting Officer (such as the "Approval Authorities" or "Contracting Officer’s Representative") will approve or disapprove an action, it is understood that only the Contracting Officer has this authority unless the individual is so designated by her in writing. Even when an individual is so designated, the Contractor may appeal the action to the Contracting Officer and the Contracting Officer's decision shall be final. In no case will "approval" by the Contracting Officer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of contract documents.



F. Government Representative: A government employee, or contracted consultant, assigned to manage activities for the government during the course of the construction of the project, i.e., the Contracting Officer's representative on the site.

G. Project Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the work, either exclusively

or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of project site is shown on drawings, and may or may not be identical with description of land upon which project is to be built.

H. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" is used to mean supply

and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

I. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" is used to describe

operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

J. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" means furnish and install,

complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

K. Installer: The term "Installer" is defined as the entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. Installers shall be skilled in the work they are to perform.

L. Specialist: The term "Specialist" means an individual or firm of established reputation (or, if

newly organized, whose personnel have previously established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a regular force of workmen skilled in either (as applicable) manufacturing or fabricating items required by the contract, installing items required by the contract, or otherwise performing work required by the contract. Where the contract specification requires installation by a specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either the manufacturer of the item, an individual or firm licensed by the manufacturer, or an individual or firm who will perform the work under the manufacturer's direct supervision.

M. Testing Laboratory: The terms "testing laboratory" or "independent laboratory" are

interchangeable, and are defined as an independent entity engaged by the Contractor to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at project site or elsewhere; and to report results of those inspections or tests.

N. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories: The term "nationally recognized testing laboratory

(NRTL)" shall mean a firm or organization which is recognized by OSHA in accordance with 29 CFR Part 1910.7 to test and approve (i.e., certify, label or list) equipment or materials as being safe for the intended use. Labeling and/or listing of products by NRTL's is acceptable wherever a reference to the UL or FMRC label is made in the specifications.



O. Label: The label must be provided by a nationally recognized testing laboratory. The contractor shall provide a statement from the testing laboratory attesting that the laboratory has been approved by OSHA to certify the category of product(s) being submitted for approval.

1.2 OVERLAPPING AND CONFLICTING ASSIGNMENTS:

A. Specifications and Drawings: Where there appear to be overlapping or conflicting requirements

in the drawings and specifications, the order of precedence established by the clauses "Specifications and Drawings for Construction" and "Specifications and Drawings" of the Contract Clauses shall govern.

B. Industry Standards: Where compliance with 2 or more industry standards or sets of

requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, themost stringent requirement shall govern.

D. Contractor's Options: Except for overlapping or conflicting requirements, where more than one

set of requirements are specified for a particular unit of work, option is intended to be Contractor's regardless of whether or not it is specifically indicated as such.

1.3 MINIMUM QUALITY/QUANTITY:

A. In every instance, the quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended to be the minimum

for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, the actual work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimums or maximums as noted or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Contracting Officer for decision before proceeding.

1.4 ASSIGNMENT OF SPECIALISTS:

A. In certain instances, specification text requires that specific work is to be assigned to specialists

who must be engaged for performance of that work. Such assignments are special requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. These requirements should not be interpreted so as to conflict with applicable regulations, union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of requirements remains with the Contractor.



1.5 DRAWING SYMBOLS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, graphic symbols used on drawings are those symbols

recognized in the construction industry for purposes indicated. Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by "Architectural Graphic Standards", published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., seventh edition.

B. Mechanical/Electrical Drawings: Graphic symbols used on mechanical/electrical drawings are

generally aligned with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, those symbols are supplemented by more specific symbols where appropriate as recommended by other recognized technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE and similar organizations. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Contracting Officer for clarification before proceeding.

1.6 INDUSTRY STANDARDS:

A. General Applicability of Standards: Except where more explicit or more stringent requirements

are written directly into the contract documents, applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect (and are made a part of contract documents by reference) as if copied directly into contract documents, or as if published copies were bound herewith, subject to the order of precedence previously stated.

B. Publication Dates: Refer to clause "Standard References" of Construction Contract Clauses.

Except as otherwise indicated, where compliance with an industry standard is required, comply with standard in effect as of Invitation for Bids.

1. Updated Standards: Submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry

standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the contract documents and before the performance of the work affected. The Contracting Officer will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard.

C. Copies of Standards: Maintain copy of referenced standards, including those referenced in the

referenced standards and where required manufacturer's instructions, where work is being performed, and make available to the Construction Engineer or inspector on request.

D. Abbreviations and Names: The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in contract

documents are defined to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of date of contract documents:

AA Aluminum Association

818 Connecticut Ave. NW Washington DC 20006

AABC Associated Air Balance Council

1518 K Street, NW, Suite 503 Washington, DC 20005



AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association

2700 River Road, Suite 118 Des Plaines, IL 60018

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

P.O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709

ACI American Concrete Institute

P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219

ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories

1725 K Street, NW Washington, DC 20006

ACS Acoustical Society of America

335 East 45th Street New York, NY 10017

ADC Air Diffusion Council

230 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1200 Chicago, IL 60611

AGA American Gas Association

1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209

AIA American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Ave., NW Washington, DC 20006

A.I.A American Insurance Association

85 John Street New York, NY 10038

AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association

475 Wolf Ledges Parkway Akron, OH 44311

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

400 N. Michigan Ave., 8th Floor Chicago, IL 60611

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

1000 - 16th Street, NW Washington, DC 20036



ALI Associated Laboratories, Inc.

Eight Brush Street Pontiac, MI 48053

ALSC American Lumber Standards Committee

P. 0. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20874

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

30 W. University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004

ANSI American National Standards Institute

655 Fifteenth Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20015

APA American Plywood Association

P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411

API American Petroleum Institute

1220 L Street, NW Washington, DC 20005

ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

1501 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209

ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council

1600 Wilson Blvd., Suite 910 Arlington, VA 22209

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017

ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811 Sherman Oaks, CA 91403

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140



ASTM ASTM

1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

2310 S. Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206

AWPA American Wood Preservers' Association

P. 0. Box 849 Stevensville, MD 21666

AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau

P.O. Box 6085 2772 S. Randolph Street Arlington, VA 22206

AWS American Welding Society

P.O. Box 351040 550 Le Jeune Road, NW Miami, FL 33135

AWWA American Water Works Association

6666 W. Quincy Ave. Denver, CO 80235

BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association

60 East 42nd St., Room 511 New York, NY 10165

CAUS Color Association of the United States

343 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10016

CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute

c/o Thomas Associates, Inc. 1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115

CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association

Hanna Building, Suite 772 1422 Euclid Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115

CE Corps of Engineers

(U.S. Department of the Army) Chief of Engineers - Referral



Washington, DC 20314

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (Available from the Government Printing Office) North Capitol Street between G and H Streets, NW Washington, DC 20402 (Material is usually first published in the Federal Register)

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

1499 Chain Bridge Road, Suite 203 McLean, VA 22101

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

1111 Eighteenth Street, NW Washington, DC 20207

CRI Carpet and Rug Institute

Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30720

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

933 Plum Grove Road Schaumsburg, IL 60195

CS Commercial Standard

(U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402

CTI Ceramic Tile Institute

700 North Virgil Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90029

DHI Door and Hardware Institute

7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102

DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association

(Formerly the National Association of Plastic Fabricators) Hulman Building, 20th Floor 120 West Second Street Dayton, OH 45402

DOC Department of Commerce

14th Street and Constitution Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20230

DOT Department of Transportation



400 Seventh Street, SW Washington, DC 20590

ECSA Exchange Carriers Standards Association

Four Century Drive, 3rd Floor Parsippany, NJ 07054

EIA Electronic Industries Association

2001 Eye Street, NW Washington, DC 20006

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

401 M Street, SW Washington, DC 20460

ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.

P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045

FAA Federal Aviation Administration

(U.S. Department of Transportation) 800 Independence Avenue, SW Washington, DC 20590

FCC Federal Communications Commission

1919 M Street, NW Washington, DC 20554

FCI Fluid Controls Institute

P.O. Box 9036 Morristown, NJ 07960

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association

White Lakes Professional Building 3310 Harrison Topeka, KS 66611

FHA Federal Housing Administration

(U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development) 451 Seventh Street, SW Washington, DC 20201

FM Factory Mutual System

1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike Norwood, MA 02062

FS Federal Specification



(General Services Administration) Specifications Units (WFCIA) 7th and D Streets, SW Washington, DC 20406

GA Gypsum Association

1603 Orrington Ave. Evanston, IL 60201

GSA General Services Administration

18th and F Streets, NW Washington, DC 20405

HEI Heat Exchange Institute

1230 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115

HI Hydronics Institute

P. 0. Box 218 35 Russo Place Berkeley Heights, NJ 07922

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.

P. 0. Box P South Yarmouth, MA 02664

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission (Available from ANSI)

655 Fifteenth Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20015

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

345 E. 47th Street New York, NY 10017-2394

IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

120 Wall Street, 17th floor New York, NY 10005-4001

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council

Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045

IRI Industrial Risk Insurers

85 Woodland Street Hartford, CT 06102

ISA Instrument Society of America

P.O. Box 12277; 67 Alexander Drive



Research Triangle Park, NC 27709

MCA Mechanical Contractor's Association of America 5410 Grosvenor Lane; Suite 120 Bethesda, MD 20814

MIL Military Standardization Documents

(U.S. Department of Defense) Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120

ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association

221 N. LaSalle Street; Suite 2026 Chicago, IL 60601

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

127 Park Street, NE Vienna, VA 22180

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

221 N. LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601

NAPF National Association of Plastic Fabricators

(Now DLPA)

NBHA National Builder's Hardware Association (Now Part of DHI) 711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22101

NBS National Bureau of Standards

(U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234

NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA)

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association

7315 Wisconsin Avenue Bethesda, MD 20814

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

2101 L Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

Batterymarch Park



Quincy, MA 02269

N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Ave., NW Washington, DC 20036

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184

NKCA National Kitchen Cabinet Association

P.O. Box 6830 Falls Church, VA 22046

NPA National Particleboard Association

18928 Premiere Court Gaithersburg, MD 20879

NPCA National Paint and Coating Association

1500 Rhode Island Avenue, NW Washington, DC 20005

NSF National Sanitation Foundation

P.O. Box 1468; 3475 Plymouth Road Ann Arbor, MI 48106

NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association

(Now NWWDA)

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402

PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute

(c/o Austin 0..Roche, Jr.) 5342 Boulevard Place Indianapolis, IN 46208

PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute

1911 North Fort Myer Drive Arlington, VA 22209

PS Product Standard of NBS

(U.S. Department of Commerce) Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402



REA Rural Electrification Association (U.S. Department of Agriculture) 14th Street and Constitution Avenue, SW Washington, DC 20250

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute

966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B Rockville, MD 20805

RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association

1400 K Street, NW Washington, DC 20005

SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association

1101 - 16th Street, NW Washington, DC 20036

S.D.I. Steel Door Institute

(c/o A. P. Wherry and Associates, Inc.) 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council

Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045

SHLMA Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Association (Now HMA)

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 E. Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association

P.O. Box 70 Merrifield, VA 22116

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213

TCA Tile Council of America

P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540

TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturer's Association

7 Kirby Plaza Mt. Kisco, NY 10549



UL Underwriters Laboratories

333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062

USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture

Independence Avenue between 12th and 14th Streets, SW Washington, DC 20250

USPS U.S. Postal Service

475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW Washington, DC 20260

WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute

8361 A Greensboro Drive McLean, VA 22102

WSC Water Systems Council

221 North LaSalle St. Chicago, IL 60601

WSFI Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute

4415 West Harrison Street, Suite 242C Hillside, IL 60162

W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association

2515 N. Nordica Ave. Chicago, IL 60635


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



SUMMARY 011000 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Name and Location: Coburn Gore LPOE Arnold Trail Coburn Gore, Franklin County, Maine

B. Project Summary Description: The project includes but is not limited to the following Work and may be stated by reference as though bound herein: The Coburn Gore Land Port of Entry (LPOE) is located in Coburn Gore, Franklin County, Maine. The site is located in the western area of the state on the Quebec (Canada) border and is considered remote for vendors and contractors to access. The site is comprised of an LPOE facility and four separate residences for Customs and Border Protection (CBP) staff housing. CBP requires the ability to accomplish visitor vehicle searches as required for those vehicles entering the US from Canada. CBP has determined that the best use of the current facilities for this purpose would be for the existing Inspection Shed portion of the Port Facility Building to be altered to accommodate vehicle search procedures. This sight is historic (the LPOE and two 1932 residences are listed on the National Historic Registry, and two 1967 residences have been determined to be eligible for the National Historic Registry), therefore any planned alterations to the facility will need to be reviewed for historical impact. The work associated with this renovation consists of the following:

• Combining two existing overhead doors into one single 12’ vehicle access door for the purpose of vehicle search.

• Structural modifications to support the installation of the 12’ vehicle access door. • Installation of rated wall and ceiling assemblies. • Adjustments to the exterior grading. • Architectural infills and finishes. • Heating and ventilation systems. • Lighting and fire alarm devices. • Modifications to existing fire protection system.



C. Architect: The term Architect refers to the project designer. The Architect's status relative to the construction will be stated in writing by the Contracting Officer prior to the pre-construction conference. The project was designed by:

Colby Company Engineering 47A York Street Portland, Maine 04101

D. The Contracting Officer for the project:

Natasha DaCruz Contracting Officer Acquisition Management Division (1PQB) Public Building Service New England Region U.S. General Services Administration 10 Causeway Street Boston, MA 02222-1077 Email: [email protected] O: 617-565-5777 C: 617-823-4283

E. The GSA Property Manager for the project:

Chris Evans Property Manager North Service Center Branch(1PSK) Public Buildings Service New England Region U.S. General Services Administration 202 Harlow Street Bangor, ME 04401 207-217-7518 Cell 207-922-3003 Office [email protected]

1.2 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The work shall be conducted in one phase.

1.3 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]



A. Work in existing facilities shall correspond in all respects with the existing conditions to which it connects, or to similar existing conditions, in materials, workmanship and finish.

B. Alterations to Existing Conditions: Existing conditions shall be cut, drilled, removed, temporarily removed, or removed and replaced, as necessary for performance of Work under the Contract. Work out of alignment where exposed by removal of existing work shall be called to the attention of GSA. Necessary corrective work shall be as directed. 1. Replacements of existing conditions that are removed shall match similar existing

conditions. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, existing structural members shall not be cut or altered without

authorization by the Contracting Officer. 3. Conditions remaining in place, which are damaged or defaced during the Work, shall be

restored to the condition existing at time of award of Contract. 4. Discolored or unfinished surfaces exposed by removal of existing conditions, that are

indicated to be final exposed surfaces, shall be refinished or replaced as necessary to produce uniform and harmonious contiguous surfaces.

C. Existing structure will remain in place.

D. Existing utility services with related meters and equipment will remain in place.

E. Removed items indicated to remain the property of the Government shall be stored on site where directed by the Contracting Officer.





SUBMITTALS 013000 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 013000 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The types of submittal requirements specified in this section include shop drawings, product data, samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal requirements are specified in applicable sections for each unit of work.

B. Requirements for record documents, progress and final photographs, and operation and

maintenance manuals are covered in Divison 01 Section "Project Closeout."

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Work-related submittals of this section are categorized for convenience as follows:

1. Shop drawings include specially-prepared technical data for this project, including drawings, diagrams, performance curves, data sheets, schedules, templates, patterns, reports, calculations, instructions, measurements and similar information not in standard printed form for general application to a range of similar projects.

2. Product data include standard printed information on materials, products and systems; not specially-prepared for this project, other than the designation of selections from among available choices printed therein.

3. Samples include both fabricated and unfabricated physical examples of materials, products and units of work; both as complete units and as smaller portions of units of work; either for limited visual inspection or (where indicated) for more detailed testing and analysis. Mock-ups are a special form of samples, which are too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling in specified manner for transmittal of sample submittals.

4. Certificates of conformance or compliance are documents attesting that a product complies with a specified standard.

5. Certified test (or inspection) reports are documents attesting that a product meets a specified level of performance or quality when a prototype specimen is tested or inspected in accordance with a specified procedure, and consist of a certified statement by the product supplier or Contractor accompanied by a complete report of the inspection or test.

6. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs, survey data and reports, physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data, operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, and similar information, devices and materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, or certified test reports.



1.3 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General:

1. All submittals shall be made to the Contracting Officer or to an individual designated by the Contracting Officer.

2. Only the Contracting Officer or an individual designated by her in writing can approve or disapprove submittals. Deviations and variations from the contract requirements contained in the submittal can be approved only by the Contracting Officer or an individual delegated such authority in writing by the Contracting Officer.

3. Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate approval on submittals prior to submission to Contracting Officer will result in their being returned to the Contractor without being acted upon.

4. No delays in construction occasioned by the Contractor's failure to submit material for approval in accordance with the approved schedule will be excused.

B. Scheduling: Submit schedule of submissions for approval by the Contracting Officer, within 14

calendar days after notice to proceed is received, unless otherwise stated.

C. All required submittals shall be submitted not later than 2 months prior to Contract Completion Date.

1. If any required submittals are not made within the stipulated time frame, the Contractor’s

monthly progress payments shall be reduced by 10% each and every month that the submittals remain outstanding. This with-holding will be released upon receipt of the outstanding submittals.

D. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with

performance of the work so that work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence different categories of submittals for same work, and for interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for coordination of the Contracting Officer's review with another.

E. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each submittal to identify project,

date, Contractor, subcontractor, submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from other submittals.

F. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and provide space for the

Contracting Officer's action marking. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor's office will be returned without action.

1.4 SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work sections, comply with requirements

specified herein for each indicated category of submittal. Provide and process intermediate submittals, where required between initial and final, similar to initial submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and Schedules" of



the Contract Clauses. Provide newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated), with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow shop drawing copies that have not been reviewed or have been disapproved to be used in connection with the work.

1. Submit for Review: Six blue-line or black-line prints.

a. The Government will retain 2 sets of prints for its use.

2. Equipment and Systems: Shop drawings for equipment and systems shall show ratings

(where applicable), and how components are assembled, function together, and how they will be installed. Shop drawings, product data, certificate of conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports, and other submittals for equipment, systems, and their component parts shall be coordinated and submitted as a unit. Multiple or piecemeal submissions are not acceptable except where prior approval is obtained from the Contracting Officer, in which case a list of data to be submitted later shall be included with the first submission.

3. Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of sleeves and inserts for equipment, and/or the performance of work in spaces in which two or more trades are involved and in which the probability of interference exists as determined by either the Contractor or the Contracting Officer, submit composite coordination drawings for the work. Show the work of all involved trades in a scale most suitable for clarity. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk, and subsequent relocations required to avoid interference shall be made at no cost to the Government. In case interference develops, the Contracting Officer will decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.

C. Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each unit of work or system; and

mark each copy to show which choices and options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field measurements which have been checked, and special coordination requirements. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at project site, available for reference.

1. Submittals: Contractor shall not submit product data, or allow its use on the project,

until he has confirmed compliance with requirements of contract documents. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned by the Contracting Officer, marked with an action which indicates an observed noncompliance. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of 6 copies; 2 copies of which will be retained by the Government.

a. Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where required (or desired by

Contractor) for selection of options by the Contracting Officer. b. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of materials, products or

systems until final copy of applicable product data is in possession of Installer.



D. Samples: (Refer to clause "Samples" of Contract Clauses.) Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide full set of optional samples where the Contracting Officer's selection is required. Prepare samples to match the Government-furnished sample where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards.

1. Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary submittal of a single set of

samples for review and action. Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless returned with action which requires resubmittal. Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned.

2. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final set of samples at project site, in suitable condition and available for quality control comparisons.

3. Reusable Samples: Returned samples which are intended or permitted to be incorporated in the work are so indicated in the individual work sections, and must be in undamaged condition at time of use.

4. Mock-ups: Mock-ups and similar samples specified in individual work sections are recognized as a special type of sample. Comply with requirements for "samples" to greatest extent possible, and process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity.

E. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Follow same procedure as for product data.

Where feasible, and/or where required by other sections of specification indicate compliance with the specified standard by means of a label on the container, or on an inconspicuous place on the product.

F. Certified Test and Inspection Reports: Process each as either "shop drawing" or "product

data", depending upon whether report is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of workmanship control testing at point of production; process accordingly.

1. Report shall include a description of the prototype specimen tested or inspected which is

sufficiently descriptive to ensure positive identification of the product by an inspector when delivered and/or installed.

2. The report shall be accompanied by a notarized statement from the supplier of the product certifying that the prototype is identical in all respects to the product proposed for the project.

3. Where feasible and/or where required by other sections of the specification, indicate compliance with the specified performance or quality by means of a label on the container or on an inconspicuous place on the product. The label shall refer to the test or inspection report and include the date of the report.

G. Warranties (Guarantees): In addition to copies desired for Contractor's use, furnish 3 executed

copies, except furnish additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance manuals.

H. Standards/Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where copy submittal is indicated, and except where specified integrally with "Product Data" submittal, submit 2 copies to the Contracting Officer. Where workmanship at project site and elsewhere is governed by standard, furnish additional copies to fabricators, installers and others involved in performance of the work.



Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the information is received. Failure to furnish the information can be cause for rejection of the material.

I. Close-out Submittals: Refer to individual work sections and to Division 01 Section "Project

Closeout" for specific requirements on submittal of close-out information, materials, tools and similar items.

J. General Distribution: Provide additional distribution of submittals (not included in foregoing

copy submittal requirements) to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and others as necessary for proper performance of the work.

1.5 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS

A. Contracting Officer's Action: Where action and return is required or requested, the Contracting

Officer, or the Contracting officer’s designated representative, will review each submittal, mark with Action, and where possible return within 2 weeks of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised.

1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with contract

documents, when submittal is returned marked “Reviewed”. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations

and corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked "Furnish as Corrected."

3. Resubmittal Required, Restricted Release: Work may proceed provided it complies with notations and corrections and any additional information requested on the submittal and with contract documents when submittal is returned marked “Revise and Resubmit”. Resubmittal is required to make the corrections and provide requested information noted.

4. Disapproved, Resubmit: Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals marked "Rejected" (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work.

5. Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other reasons, with the Contracting Officer's explanation included, it will be marked "Action Not Required."





SCHEDULES AND REPORTS 013100- 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 013100 - SCHEDULES AND REPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate both the timing and the listing of reports and other activities required by provisions of this and other sections, to provide consistency and logical coordination between submitted reports or lists. Maintain coordination and correlation between separate reports by updating at monthly or shorter time intervals. Make appropriate distribution of each report and updated report to entities involved in the work.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Construction Contract Clause "Schedules for Construction Contracts."

B. Individual Work Stages: Show significant stages for each category or unit of work, including

(where applicable), but not necessarily limited to, subcontract lettering, submittals, purchases, mockups, fabrication, sample testing, deliveries, installation, testing, adjusting, curing, start-up and placement into final use and operation.

C. Distribution: Following the initial submittal to and response by the Contracting Officer, print

and distribute progress schedule to the Contracting Officer (3 copies), separate Contractors (if any), principal subcontractors and suppliers or fabricators, and others with a need-to-know schedule-compliance requirement. When revisions are made, distribute updated issues to same entities, and post in same locations. Delete entities from distribution when they have completed their assigned work and are no longer involved in performance of scheduled work.

1.3 SCHEDULE SUBMISSIONS:

A. General: Submit construction progress schedule within 20 calendar days after Notice to

Proceed is received. Immediately after the development and Owner’s review and comment of the fully developed progress schedule, prepare a complete schedule of work-related submittals. Submit the schedule of work-related submittals within 10 days of the date required for establishment of progress schedule.

B. Form: Prepare the schedule in chronological order of submittals. Show category of the

submittal, name of subcontractor, a generic description of work covered, related section numbers, the activity or event number on the progress schedule, the scheduled date for first submittal, resubmittal, and the final release or approval by the Contracting Officer.

C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule each time revisions have been recognized or made.

Resubmit for the Government's review and comment.

1.4 REPORTS:



A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following

information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Contracting Officer at weekly intervals:

1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 4. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 5. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 6. Meetings and significant decisions. 7. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 8. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 9. Meter readings and similar recordings. 10. Emergency procedures. 11. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 12. Change Orders received, implemented. 13. Services connected, disconnected. 14. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 15. Partial Completions, occupancies. 16. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals prepare a comprehensive list of materials

delivered to and stored at the site. The list shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with the list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of the list to the Contracting Officer at weekly intervals.

C. Field Correction Report: When the need to take corrective action that requires a departure from

the Contract Documents arises, prepare a detailed report including a statement describing the problem and recommended changes. Indicate reasons the Contract Documents cannot be followed. Submit a copy to the Contracting Officer immediately.

1.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to the Contracting Officer within one day of an

occurrence. Submit a copy to the Architect and other parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by the Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects and similar pertinent information. Advise the Contracting Officer in advance when such events are known or predictable.




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Contracting Officer, Government, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Contracting Officer.

C. E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.



F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Contracting Officer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Contracting Officer for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with the requirements of the Constructions Contract Clauses, Division 01 Section "Submittals" and the individual sections specifying the work.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a



recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Government's records, submit copies of permits,

licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.



D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing

the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.



2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Contracting Officer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Contracting Officer. 2. Notify Contracting Officer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will

be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Government Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Government's responsibility, Government will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Government will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Government are Contractor's responsibility.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Government, unless agreed to in writing by Government.



2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Contracting Officer and Contractor in

performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Contracting Officer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and



replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Government, Contracting Officer, testing agencies,

and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as

required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Contracting Officer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies

observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Contracting Officer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Contracting Officer. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to

test and inspection log for Contracting Officer's reference during normal working hours.



3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000


TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000- 1

PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but are not limited to, utility services, construction facilities, security/protection provisions, and support facilities.

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS

A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required

for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at

locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

C. Existing Equipment on Site: Cover equipment that is to remain in place within the area of

contract operations and protect it against damage or loss. Store equipment that is removed in performance of work where directed or reuse in work as required by drawings and specifications. Equipment temporarily removed shall be protected, cleaned and replaced equal to its condition prior to starting work. Security for equipment or material that is to be reused and is removed for temporary storage shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Weather Protection:

1. Submit weather protection plan to the Contracting Officer for approval. Any changes to

approved plan must be approved by the Contracting Officer. 2. Provide protection for all work areas affected by moisture and cold, such as building

floor areas, masonry scaffolds and fabrication areas by covering, enclosing and/or heating to maintain a relatively dry work area with a minimum temperature of 40 degrees F at the working surface so as to permit a normal progression of construction work. Provide a minimum temperature higher than 40 degrees F when a higher temperature is required to conform with requirements specified elsewhere. Weather protection is not required for site work, excavation, pile driving, steel erection, roofing, and similar

operations normally done in the open. See specific technical specification sections for




minimum and maximum environmental conditions required for specific work installations and applications. Technical specifications requirements shall govern.

3. Provide climatic protection against the deleterious effects of moisture and cold for existing finishes and equipment for all areas under the control of the contractor. Continuous protection shall be provided, whether or not contract work is specifically required in such areas, work will be performed intermittently in such areas, or work will be performed at the beginning or the end of the contract duration within the areas required to be climatically protected.

4. Provide accurate Fahrenheit thermometers for every 2,000 square feet of floor space, located as directed by the Contracting Officer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES:

A. The types of services required include, but are not limited to, water, sewerage, surface drainage, electrical power and telephones. When connecting to existing franchised utilities for required services, comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.

B. Water: Utility services supplying the premises are not available for use in this work.

Contractor shall make his own arrangements for such services. Where non-potable water is used, mark each outlet with hazardous warning signs.

C. Electric Power: Premises are not supplied with electrical services. Contractor shall make his

own arrangements for such services.

D. Temporary Power: Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter features, activated from each circuit of 20-amp or less rating.

3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES:

A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but are not limited to, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, and roads. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

B. Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure adequate workmanship, weather

protection and ambient conditions required for the work, provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of




temporary lighting.

C. Heating: Refer to "Heat" clause of Contract Clauses Obtain approval of proposed temporary heating system from the Contracting Officer prior to placing in service. Oil burners, salamanders, or open braziers are not permitted. Comply with applicable Federal, State, and local safety regulations.

1. The Contractor may utilize the heating system and related equipment to furnish the

specified heating results prior to the time of completion of the building. However, the equipment shall be operated by qualified personnel and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and good engineering practice. Clean, flush, and fill the heating system piping with treated water prior to use for temporary heat. Treatment must be in accordance with the recommendations of a qualified water treatment laboratory, and shall be in addition to the final treatment specified elsewhere.

2. Prior to the time of final inspection, place the heating system and related equipment in first class, equal to new condition, satisfactory to the Contracting Officer. Provide boiler water treatment if condensate is wasted or if its use is considered necessary by the Contracting Officer or his designated representative.

3. The operation of the equipment prior to acceptance by the Government shall not change the date of the guarantee period.

4. The Contracting Officer will determine sufficiency of, and time when heat is to be provided in occupied portions of the building.

D. Electrical Facilities: Provide all temporary electrical facilities, including lamps, required for

construction and safety operations. Remove all such equipment when permanent connections have been completed. Where it is determined, during construction, that the temporary facilities, as installed, interfere with Government operations or other construction operations and, when notified by the Contracting Officer, relocate said facilities in an approved manner at no cost to the Government. No wire, bus or electrical equipment which is part of any of the permanent electrical systems may be used for temporary electrical service for construction operations, unless specifically approved by the Contracting Officer. Temporary connections shall be in accordance with NEC and OSHA requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage or injury to equipment, materials, or personnel caused by improperly protected temporary installations. All costs for materials and installation for temporary electrical facilities and energy for their operation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The hours of operation, level of illumination and coverage for safety of personnel shall meet the minimum requirements of OSHA and the Contracting Officer. Provide electrical welders used in the erection and fabrication of the building and its equipment with an independent grounding cable connected directly to the structure on which the weld is being made rather than to adjacent conduit or piping.

3.3 SECURITY PROVISIONS:

A. General: Provide security services and systems such as to achieve 24-hour, 7 days per week

protection from theft, vandalism, personal injury and property damage. Refer to Division 01 Section "Safety and Health." Provisions shall include, but not be limited to the following:




1. Permanent Fire Protection: Complete each fire protection facility at earliest reasonable

date, and make ready for emergency use, and instruct personnel at site on availability and proper use.

2. Building Enclosure and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

3.5 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES:

A. General: The types of temporary support facilities required include, but are not limited to, field

offices, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, private and public telephones, clocks, thermometer, cleanup facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by the Contracting Officer and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.

B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary sanitary facilities as required to meet applicable Federal,

State, and local regulations. Keep in sanitary condition and prior to substantial completion, remove from site. Contractor's personnel is not permitted to use toilet rooms on the premises.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 015050 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 015050 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS

A. GENERAL WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS:

1. The General Services Administration has established that this Project shall generate the least amount of waste possible.

2. The Sub Contractor shall employ processes which ensure the generation of as little waste as possible and shall avoid the generation of waste due to the following:

a. Over-packaging b. Error c. Poor planning, layout d. Over ordering e. Breakage f. Mishandling g. Contamination h. Damage from weather

3. Of the inevitable waste that is generated, as many of the waste materials as

economically feasible shall be reused, salvaged, or recycled. 4. Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible.

B. WASTE DIVERSION GOALS:

1. Type of project:

a. New construction: Minimum 50% of total project waste shall be diverted from landfill.

b. Demolition, Major remodeling: Minimum 50% of total project waste shall be diverted from landfill.

2. The following waste categories, at a minimum, shall be diverted from landfill:

a. Green waste (biodegradable landscaping materials) b. Soil c. Inerts (concrete, asphalt, masonry) d. Clean dimensional wood, palette wood e. Engineered wood products: Plywood, Particle board, etc. f. Cardboard, paper, packaging g. Metals from banding, ductwork, framing, roofing and siding, flashing,



piping and rebar. Including steel, iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass and bronze

h. Insulation i. Gypsum board j. Carpet and tile k. Paint l. Plastics: ABS, PVC m. Beverage containers

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. WORK INCLUDED:

1. Waste Management Plan development and implementation. 2. Meetings: goals, issues and training for the Waste Management Plan. 3. Techniques to minimize waste generation. 4. Sorting and separation of waste materials. 5. Reuse: reuse of salvaged materials on site. 6. Salvage: salvage of existing materials and items for reuse or resale. 7. Recycling: recycling of materials which cannot be reused or sold. 8. Records keeping: keeping of receipts and records of salvaged, recycled or

landfilled materials.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 3. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board 4. Section 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings 5. Section 099123 - Interior Painting 6. Section 230000 - HVAC 7. Section 260000 - Electrical

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CLASS III LANDFILL: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as

household, commercial, and industrial waste resulting form construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations. A Class III Landfill must have a solid waste facilities permit from the California Integrated Waste Management Board and is regulated by the Local Enforcement Agency.

B. CLEAN: Untreated and unpainted; uncontaminated with adhesives, oils, solvents, mastics,

and like products.

C. CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE: Includes all non-hazardous resources resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair and demolition operations.



D. DISMANTLE: The process of parting out a building in such a way as to preserve the usefulness of its materials and components.

E. DISPOSAL: acceptance of solid wastes at a legally operating facility for the purpose of

landfilling. Includes Class III landfills and inert fills.

F. INERT BACKFILL SITE: A location, other than inert fill or other disposal facility, to which inert materials are taken for the purpose of filling an excavation, shoring or other soils engineering operation.

G. INERT FILL: A facility that can legally accept inert waste such as asphalt and concrete

exclusively for the purpose of disposal.

H. INERT SOLIDS/INERT WASTE: Non-liquid solid resources including, but not limited to, soil and concrete, that does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water-quality objectives established by a regional Water Board pursuant to Division 7 (Section 13000 et seq.) of the California Water Code and does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid resources.

I. MIXED DEBRIS: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable materials

generated at the construction site.

J. MIXED DEBRIS RECYCLING FACILITY: A solid resources processing facility that accepts loads of mixed construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering reusable and recyclable materials and disposing non-recyclable materials.

K. PERMITTED WASTE HAULER: A company that holds a valid permit from the Alameda

County Department of Public Health to collect and transport solid wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal in Alameda County.

L. RECYCLING: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting materials for

the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.

1. On-site Recycling: Materials that are sorted and processed on site for use in an

altered stated in the Work, i.e. concrete crushed for use as a sub-base in paving. 2. Off-site Recycling: Materials hauled to a location and used in an altered form in

the manufacture of a new product.

M. RECYCLING FACILITY: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of a new product. Depending on the types of materials accepted and operating procedures, a recycling facility may or may not be required to have a Solid Waste Facilities permit from the CIWMB or be regulated by the Local Enforcement Agency.

N. RE-USE: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form, on- or off-site.

O. RETURN: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.



P. SALVAGE: To remove waste materials from the site for resale or re-use by a third party.

Q. SOURCE-SEPARATED MATERIALS: Materials that are sorted by type at the Site for the purpose of reuse and recycling.

R. SOLID WASTE: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and are discarded

for the purposes of disposal.

S. TRANSFER STATION: A facility that can legally accept solid wasted for the purpose of temporarily storing the materials for re-loading onto other trucks and transporting them to a landfill for disposal, or recovering some materials for re-use or recycling.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. GUIDES: The following publications list agencies and businesses in the reuse, recycling and salvage business community.

1. Alameda County Recycling Guide: Available from Alameda County Waste

Management Authority and Source Reduction and Recycling Board (510/614- 1699.)

2. Business Reuse and Recycling Catalog: Available from Calmax: California Materials Exchange of the California Integrated Waste Management Board (916/255-2369.)

3. Waste Spec Model Specifications for Construction Waste Reduction, Reuse, and Recycling. Available from the Triangle J Council of Governments (919/549-0551)

B. SALVAGE, RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL RESOURCES: No preference is given to

the recycles listed below; they are listed for the convenience of the contractor.

1. Cardboard, paper, packaging

a. Contact: California Waste Solutions (510/836-6200); Community Conservation (510/524-0113)

2. Clean dimensional wood, palette wood

a. Contact: California Waste Solutions (510/836-6200); Davis Street Smart

Recycling (510/638-2303); Sierra Pine Limited (510/264-1900).

3. Usable Palettes

a. Contact: Industrial Palette (510/489-4050); Mission Palette Company (510/261-0994).

4. Metals from banding, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron,

galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.



a. Contact: Alliance Metals (510/547-2408); DC Metals (510/836-2655).

5. Carpet and Tile

a. Contact: Return to manufacturer; donate large remnants to non-profit. b. Recycling Contact: Monroe Schneider Associates, (510/373-0900).

6. Gypsum Board

a. Contact drywall manufacturer: Can be recycled back into new drywall,

drywall scrap must be clean, and free from contaminants. b. Soil amendment: Provides the following benefits to soils: Improves water

penetration and workability of impermeable alkali soils, softens soils with high clay content, helps neutralized soil acidity, and adds nutrients calcium and sulfur to soil. Drywall also contains boron, and while too much boron can be toxic to plants, it is a plant nutrient in soils with a low boron content, typically volcanic soils.

i. Markets include - Reuse on site, general agriculture, mushroom

growing, forestry and mine reclamation, nurseries, city parks and recreation areas, residential lawns, golf courses, and compost additive.

ii. Processing equipment: Can range from large plants to small mobile chippers. Hammermills are often used.

7. Paint

a. Contact, paint recycles: E-Coat, Kelly Moore (916/921-0165); The Green

Paint Company (800/527-8866). b. Contact, hazardous waste management: Alameda County Household

Waste Management Program (800/606-6606); Safety Clean (510/832- 7942).

8. Insulation

a. Check with manufacturer or installer for take-back programs.

9. Beverage containers

a. Contact: California Waste Solutions (510/836-6200); Community

Conservation (510/524-0113)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN: Prior to any waste removal, the Contractor shall submit to the Government a Waste Management Plan. The Plan shall contain the following:



1. Analysis of the estimated job site waste to be generated, including types and

quantities. Use estimating sheets provided. 2. Proposed Alternatives to Landfilling: Contractor shall prepare a list of each

material proposed to be salvaged, re-used, or recycled during the course of the Project.

3. Methods handling of materials to be recycled

a. On site:

i. Materials separation ii. Materials storage ii. Materials protection, where applicable.

b. Off site: Provide name of mixed debris recycling facility; include list of

materials to be recycled.

4. Materials Handling Procedures: A description of the means to be employed in recycling the above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.

5. Landfill options: The name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of. 6. Meetings: Contractor shall conduct Construction Waste Management meetings.

Meetings shall include the Subcontractor, the Project Manager, the LBNL EH&S Representative and the LBNL Inspector. At a minimum, waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at the following meetings:

a. Pre-bid meeting. b. Pre-construction meeting. c. Regular job-site meetings.

7. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable

materials (whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler and removed from the site) and destination of materials

8. Waste Management Plan Implementation

a. Manager: The Subcontractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and subcontractors, and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the project.

b. Distribution: The Subcontractor shall distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Project Manager, the LBNL EH&S Representative and the LBNL Inspector and the Project Superintendent

c. Instruction: The Subcontractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the Project.

d. Separation facilities: The Subcontractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for reuse, salvage,



recycling, and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination or mixing of materials.

e. Hazardous wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local, state and federal regulations.

B. REPORTS

1.

The Contractor shall submit ( monthly, quarterly, at end of job), a Waste Management Progress Report. (see form provided) The report shall contain the following information:

a. The amount (in tons or cubic yards) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid at the landfill, and the total disposal cost. Include legible copies of manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. Manifests shall be from recycles and/or disposal site operators that can legally accept the materials for the purpose of reuse, recycling or disposal.

b. For each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, provide the following:

i. Amount (in tons or cubic yards) ii. Date removed from the job site iii. Receiving party iv. Transportation cost v. Amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or

salvaged material vi. Net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material.

Attach manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and or invoices. vii. Indicate the project information, including project title, name

of company completing form, beginning and ending dates of period covered by summary form.


A. Comply with California State Assembly Bill 939 - Solid Waste

B. Comply with EPA Executive Order 12873,1993.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION: Not Used



CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT 015150 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 015150 - CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY (IAQ) MANAGEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT and all Sections within DIVISION 01 which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Requirements for minimum indoor air quality (IAQ) performance standards during the construction

period and before occupancy.

B. With regard to these goals the Contractor shall develop, for Contracting Officer review, a Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan for this Project, consisting of requirements as listed below.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Examine Contract Documents for requirements that affect work of this Section. Other

Specification Sections that directly relate to work of this Section include, but are not limited to:

1. Section 010400, Project Coordination 2. Section 013000, Submittals. 3. Section 015000, Temporary Facilities. 4. Section 017400, Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 5. Division 23 – MECHANICAL. 6. Divisions 2 through 32 Specification Sections; Specific requirements relating to indoor air

quality for each Section.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction activity shall be controlled to avoid causing detectable odor, visible dust, and other air pollutants known to present a significant risk of illness in occupied work areas. Throughout the duration of this project, the Contractor shall perform the work required by the Contract Documents without affecting indoor environmental quality (IEQ) in tenant occupied areas. Work shall be performed with special care, planning, and quality control to avoid disruption or interference with normal facility and business operations; and to protect the health and safety of the tenants.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate manpower, equipment, and materials at

appropriate times (including nights and weekends) to meet the requirements of this Section and project schedule milestone dates.

C. An onsite meeting shall be held with the Contractor, Government, Contracting Officer, and other

involved parties to review IAQ controls, HVAC protection, and planned work practices prior to



any demolition or renovation activities and periodically during the project.

D. If the Government determines that the Contractor is violating the IAQ specification or endangering building occupants, the Contractor must cease operations until corrective actions are taken.

E. Comply with minimum requirements of Sections 4 through 7 of ASHRAE 62.1-2004,

Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality and approved Addenda.

1. Coordinate with requirements of Section 019100, Commissioning, and Division 23 – MECHANICAL.

F. Prevent exposure of building systems to environmental tobacco smoke during construction. At a

minimum, take the following measures:

1. Do not allow smoking in enclosed portions of the project site. 2. Locate exterior designated smoking areas at least 25 feet away from entries, outdoor air

intakes and operable windows..

G. During construction meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the recommended Control Measures of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, Chapter 3.

H. Protect absorptive materials from moisture damage when stored on-site and after installation.

I. Conduct all construction activities with potential dust and odors or other contaminants of possible

impacts on occupied areas behind barriers or after daytime work hours. Provide air sampling and results when requested to ensure regulatory compliance. Air sampling plans will be developed by a Certified Industrial Hygienist and results shared with the Government in a timely manner. Other IAQ control measures include use of low emitting products, equipment, or procedures, isolation of work (barriers, proper pressurization or scheduling), and housekeeping.

J. Work adjacent to occupied areas shall be separated by full height steel stud and gypsum board

demising partitions which prevent the penetration of dust and odors or other contaminants of concern. Partitions shall be fire taped and shall extend from floor to roof deck and shall be sealed at top, bottom, and all penetrations. Emergency exit doors shall be self-closing and weather-stripped.

K. Construction areas shall be maintained under negative pressure in relation to occupied areas

where practical. This may be accomplished by supplying outside air to the occupied side or exhausting air from the construction side. Any air exhausted into occupied spaces or walkways will be HEPA filtered.

L. Work activities presenting a potential health hazard shall be conducted after daytime work hours.

Roofing, indoor cutting of steel, concrete, or masonry, vehicles powered by internal combustion engines which are operated inside the building, removal of asbestos-containing materials, abatement of lead painted or primed surfaces, welding, and other activities producing significant dust, odors or fumes shall be conducted after daytime work hours unless the Contractor can



demonstrate that controls will maintain acceptable IAQ in occupied areas.

M. Immediate measures shall be taken to dry any area where flooding, water leakage, or condensation occurs. Wet areas should be clean and dry within 48 hours.

N. During construction, comply with the following requirements, per LEED EQ Cr. 3.1:

1. If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) of 8 shall be used at each return air grille, as determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. Replace filtration media immediately prior to occupancy.

O. After construction ends but before occupancy, comply with one of the following requirements,

per LEED EQ Cr. 3.2:

1. Perform a building flush-out with outside air in compliance with the procedures described in LEED-NC version 2.2.

2. Conduct IAQ testing for air contaminant levels in the building and demonstrate concentrations below listed maximums as described in LEED-NC version 2.2.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management Plan:

1. Within 21 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to

the Contracting Officer a Construction IAQ Management Plan for review. 2. The proposed Plan shall comply with Division 23 – MECHANICAL requirements. 3. The proposed Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Protection of ventilation system components during construction. b. Cleaning and replacing contaminated ventilation system components after

construction, including filtration media. c. Temporary ventilation. d. Protection of absorptive materials from moisture damage when stored on-site and after

installation, including exterior wall rain protection. e. Sequence of finish installation plan. f. Selection of cleaning products and procedures to be used during construction and final

cleaning. g. Other items as required by SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under

Construction, Chapter 3. 4. Coordinate Construction IAQ Management Plan with existing building IAQ management

plans and procedures. 5. Comply with the requirements of LEED EQ Credits 3.1 and 3.2. 6. Submit final Construction IAQ Management Plan within 7 calendar days of receipt of

review comments provided by GSA.

B. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Data: Submit emission test data as required, with testing laboratory and date clearly identified.



C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): Submit for materials as required, with date clearly

identified. MSDS must contain specific chemical content data identifying the percent of the total product mass represented by each listed chemical.

D. Product Data: Submit for each type of filtration media used during construction and installed

immediately prior to occupancy, with MERV values clearly identified.

E. HVAC Protection Plan: Before beginning work on each major renovation phase, the Contractor shall submit four copies of an HVAC Operation and Protection Plan which must be approved by the Government. The submittal must include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s information for all cleaning and sanitizing products including MSDS.

2. Time periods when HVAC equipment which will affect occupied areas will be shut down.

Shutdown of equipment shall only occur with prior approval and at times of least occupancy.

3. Indicate any HVAC equipment located in the renovation area that will be operating and for

what purpose. Indicate how this equipment will be protected from dust and moisture.

4. Indicate on a drawing where a duct or HVAC system which serves both renovation and occupied areas will be sealed. Location must be approved.

5. Indicate on the project schedule when HVAC equipment for each renovation phase will be

fully operational. A renovated area will not be cleared for occupancy unless HVAC systems are completely functioning including, but not limited to, exhaust fans, controls, dampers, air-handling units, unit ventilators, fan coil units, etc. HVAC system shall be capable of operating for a two-week period before occupancy to ventilate renovated spaces.

F. At least two weeks before initiating work on each major project phase, Contractor shall submit

four copies of an IAQ/IEQ Control Plan and an HVAC Protection Plan which must be approved. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Listing of all products and equipment to be used, including Material Safety Data

Sheets (MSDS) where applicable.

2. Description of dusts, odors, fumes, or potentially harmful pollutants which could be released by work activities.

3. Description of potential pathways by which pollutants could migrate from work area.

4. Description of barriers planned between work areas and occupied space.

5 Listing of work activities scheduled after normal work hours to avoid occupant

exposure.

6 Procedures for daily cleaning and waste disposal.



7. Schedule for final cleaning and ventilation of finished areas prior to occupancy.

8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable sections of this Specification.

Requirements which are not applicable should be explained (e.g. a small scale job which can be completed overnight when an area is unoccupied and cleaned before the next work day may not need a barrier).

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Take special care to prevent accumulation of moisture on materials and within packaging during delivery, storage, and handling to prevent development of mold and mildew inside packaging and on products.

B. Immediately remove from site and properly dispose of materials showing signs of mold and

mildew, including materials with moisture stains.

C. Any mold growth must be remediated following approved procedures and EPA guidelines

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FILTRATION MEDIA

A. Filtration Media: Comply with ASHRAE 52.2-1999 and provide MERV as required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION IAQ MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. IAQ Manager: Designate an on-site person responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Construction IAQ Management Plan for the Project. The Contractor-designated IAQ Manager and the Environmental Control Officer shall be available for meetings (preconstruction, monthly coordination, on-site discussions and inspections, and shall be active members of the CBP/GSA Andover Safety/Health/Environmental Team during this project.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of the Construction IAQ Management Plan to the Job Site

Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Contracting Officer, and the Architect.

C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate procedures and methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the Project.

D. Preconditioning: Allow products which have odors and significant volatile organic compounds

(VOC) emissions, to off-gas in a dry, well-ventilated space for a sufficient period to dissipate odors and emissions prior to delivery to Project.



1. Remove containers and packaging from materials prior to conditioning to maximize off- gassing of VOCs.

2. Condition products in ventilated warehouse or other building.

E. Coordinate Construction IAQ Management Plan with final cleaning as indicated in Section 017000, “Project Closeout”.

3.02 PROTECTION OF HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Construction operations shall be conducted so as to maintain ventilation, comfort and mechanical equipment sanitation in occupied work areas with measures including:

1. Before each renovation phase begins, verify which HVAC systems are within the

renovation area and determine whether any HVAC systems serve both the renovation and the non-renovation areas.

2 HVAC systems in renovation areas shall be de-energized. Duct systems, air-handling units,

fan coil units, and unit ventilators that are not removed shall be protected from construction dust and debris by sealing outlets and openings with 6-mil plastic sheeting. Stand-alone units (e.g. fan coil units and unit ventilators) shall be wrapped with 6 mil plastic and sealed with tape. HVAC systems that are modified during the renovation shall be sealed until modifications are made and resealed after modifications are completed.

3. After dust-producing renovation work is completed, coils and drain pans of existing air-

handling units, fan coil units, and unit ventilators that were not removed during renovation shall be cleaned. Submit proposed cleaning products including MSDS sheets to CBP IEQ contact prior to starting cleaning. Interior metal surfaces (including fans and dampers) may be cleaned and sanitized by wiping with a 10% bleach solution. Internally insulated surfaces shall be HEPA vacuumed. Repair or replace any insulation that is delaminating from unit casing. Check that all condensate drain pipes drain properly and are not blocked; clean any blockage.

4. New air-handling units, fan coil units, or unit ventilators shall be protected from weather,

dust-producing procedures, or damage. Take immediate measures to dry any equipment that becomes wet. If any mold growth develops on equipment because it was not protected or dried properly, remediate the equipment.

5. Operating HVAC systems should not serve both occupied and construction area. If HVAC

systems serve both occupied and construction areas, ducts serving the construction areas shall be isolated from the system either by sealing openings and closing dampers or disconnecting ducts from the HVAC system and sealing openings. If HVAC systems have direct expansion coils, verify that reduced airflow will not adve rse ly affect direct expansion coil operation.

6. Openings in non-operating ducts that interconnect construction and occupied areas shall be

sealed with 6-mil plastic.



7. If HVAC equipment is operated in construction area, filters having a minimum efficiency of 30% (atmospheric dust spot efficiency test) or MERV 6 rating shall be installed on return air openings. Filters shall be changed every two weeks.

8. Clean duct system following National Air Duct Cleaning Association (NADCA) procedures

if units were operated without filtration during construction.

9. Do not allow chilled water to flow through pipes in renovation areas until the vapor retarder on pipes is completely sealed. Replace any insulation which becomes wet because of unsealed vapor barrier.

3.03 NEW CONSTRUCTION ACCEPTANCE (APPLIES TO FINISHED AREAS TRANSITIONING BACK TO TENANT)

A. New or renovated areas will not be accepted by the CBP for occupancy and CBP

operations unless acceptable IAQ conditions can be demonstrated, including successful implementation of the following:

1. When newly constructed or renovated areas are first occupied, IEQ should be equivalent to

conditions considered acceptable in other CBP occupied areas.

2. Before occupancy, HVAC control systems must be functioning.

3. HVAC equipment exposed to construction must be cleaned.

4. Filters must be changed immediately prior to occupancy.

5. Construction work must be completed one week before area is scheduled to be occupied.

6. Clean exposed surfaces from top to bottom until no dust or debris is visible.

7. Provide continuous (overnight) ventilation for at least one week before and two weeks after completion of construction in each space.

8. Schedule any punch list work which produces odor or dust after normal CBP daytime work

hours.



SECURITY REGULATIONS 015410 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 015410 - SECURITY REGULATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 A.

GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS

Bidding Clearances: Bidders will be required to comply with security regulations imposed by the occupying agency including any necessary clearances. Access to the project site will be

limited to specific times established by the Government.

B.

Construction Clearances: After award of the Contract, all Contractor employees shall be required to furnish information for security clearances and shall comply with security regulations as imposed by the Department of Homeland Security and/or by the occupying agency.

C. Non-publicity: It is a specific condition of this Contract that the Contractor, or any subcontractors performing work on this project, shall not use or allow to be used any aspect of this project for publicity or advertising brochures, without the written consent of GSA.

D. Facilities and Procedures: The following security facilities and procedures will apply for work under this contract.

1. The contractor will be limited to one controlled entry point to the job site through which all personnel must pass and which will be staffed by the Government.

2. Notwithstanding the fact that a Federal Protection Officer or Marshal may be on site, the Contractor hereby releases the Government from all demands, actions, claims and liability whatsoever of every name and nature in any manner related to repair and alteration undertaken by the Contractor or any Subcontractor under this contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for all tools, materials, and property, until the project is accepted by the Government.

DEFINITIONS: The following definitions shall be used for interpretation of the security regulations for this contract.

A. Contractor Suitability Clearance Point of Contact (CSC) (POC). A non-federal employee serving as the applicant’s direct representative. The Contractor Suitability Clearance Point of Contact must remain actively involved in the Regional Contractor Suitability Program during the entire construction project by serving as a liaison between the Applicant, Contract Company and the GSA 1PMF Security Office.

B. Declaration for Federal Employment (Optional Form 306). Required document to be submitted for both the National Agency Check (NAC) and National Agency Check with Written Inquiries (NACI) suitability determination process.

C. Electronic Questionnaires for Investigations Processing (E-QIP). A web-based application system which houses the electronic version of the Standard Form 85 (SF-85). E-QIP is governed and mandated



by the Office of Personnel Management (OPM).

D. Escort. A credentialed 1) Federal employee; 2) Long Term GSA Contractor (mechanical, janitorial, elevator and cafeteria worker); or 3) DHS/FPS guard service contractor who possesses an agency issued HSPD-12 identification credential to accompany an Escorted Contractor on Federal premises.

E. Escorted Contractor. A non-federal employee performing work on Federal premises on a non- recurring or intermittent basis from 1 calendar day up to 15 calendar days. An Escorted Contractor is not required to have a suitability determination but is required to have an escort.

D. GSA Contracting Officers Technical Representative/Project Manager (COTR)/PM. Government employees who have the authority to do the following:1) determine escorts; 2) notify DHS/FPS in writing of escorted contractors. GSA Contracting Officers Technical Representatives/Project Managers (COTR)/PM include but are not limited to the following positions: Contracting Officers, and Property Managers.

E. GSA 1PMF Security Office. The GSA 1PMF Security Office maintains the responsibility for the Re- gional Contractor Suitability Program and is the liaison between GSA and DHS/FPS. Government employees who have the authority to do the following: 1) request applicant suitability determinations; 2) notify applicants of suitability determination; 3) perform other duties associated with the Contractor Suita- bility Program.

F. Long Term Contractor - U.S. or Naturalized Citizen or Non-U.S. Citizen legally residing in U.S. A non-federal employee performing only project work on Federal premises on a recurring basis for 181 calendar days or more. These individuals must have a National Agency Check with Written Inquiries (NACI), if only the non-federal employee is residing in the U.S. for 3 or more consecutive years.

L. National Agency Check (N AC). A basic background check that is an integral part of all background investigations consisting of searches in the OPM Security/Suitability Investigations Index (SII), the Feder- al Bureau of Investigation (FBI) Identification Division’s name and fingerprint files, and other files or indices from supporting local and state governments when necessary. A NAC is valid for 180 calendar days from the date on the DHS/FPS suitability determination letter.

M. National Agency Check with Written Inquiries (NACI). A background check that consists of a NAC with written inquiries and searches of records covering specific areas of an individual’s background during the past seven years (inquiries sent to current and past employers, schools attended, references, and local law enforcement authorities). A NACI is valid for 5 years from the date on the DHS/FPS suitability determination letter.

N. Suitability Determination. The process of determining whether a contractor is suitable to work on Federal premises. A suitability determination establishes a contractor’s loyalty, character, trustworthi- ness, reliability and therefore eligibility for the issuance of a GSA identification credential. Suitability determinations are either favorable or unfavorable.

O. Temporary Contractor. A non-federal employee performing only project work on Federal premises on a recurring, non-recurring, or intermittent basis from 1 calendar day up to 180 calendar days. These individuals must have a National Agency Check (NAC).

1.2 GENERAL PERSONNEL SECURITY PROCEDURES



E. Nonpublicity: It is a specific condition of this Contract that the Contractor, or any

subcontractors performing work on this project, shall not use or allow to be used any aspect of this project for publicity or advertising brochures.

F. Agency Security Regulations: All persons employed within the boundaries of the property or

restricted-access areas therein, and all persons permitted to enter such property and areas shall comply with the security regulations that have been established for this Contract.

1.The Contractor shall comply with agency personal identity verification procedures identi fied in the contract that implement Homeland Security Presidential Directive-12 (HSPD-12), Office of Management and Budget (OMB) guidance M-05-24 and Federal Information Processing Stand- ards Publication (FIPS PUB) Number 201. 2. The Contractor shall insert this clause in all subcontracts when the subcontractor is required to have routine physical access to a Federally-controlled facility and/or routine access to a Feder- ally-controlled information system.

The process is as follows:

1. At the commencement of the work under this Contract, the following security facilities

and procedures will be set forth by the GSA Regional Security Office, working with the Contractor Suitability Clearance (CSC), Point of Contract (POC) that has been designated by the general contractor company:

2. At the request of the Contracting Officer (CO), or Contracting Officer’s Representative (COTR) / Project Manager (PM), the CSC POC must commence the Contractor Suitability adjudication process for either a National Agency Check (NAC) adjudication or a long-term National Agency Check with written inquiries (NACI) Adjudication.

3. Upon 48 hours after the contract has been awarded, the CO, COTR/PM, willnotify the

GSA Regional Security Office of specific contract information. The GSA Regional Security Office will prepare and submit documentation and instructions to the CSC POC in order to commence the contractor suitability process, as well as, send the CSC POC the required DHS/FPS FD258 fingerprint cards. The type of adjudication to be processed is determined at the sole discretion of the GSA Regional Security Office based on contract information that is derived from the CO, or COTR/PM.

Temporary Contractor. A non-federal employee performing only project work on Federal premises on a non-recurring, or intermittent basis from 1 calendar day up to 180 calendar days. These individuals must receive a National Agency Check (NAC) Favorable Suitability Determination.

A. The GSA 1PMF Security Office provides the following information to the CSC POC.

• Emails the DHS Contractor Information Worksheet (CIW) with sections 2 through 4 completed. • Emails the OF 306 with the Addendum to the OF 306, Item 16 working document for each appli-

cant.



• Emails the Contractor Suitability Request Transmittal Form with Section A partially completed • Mails 2 original sets of the DHS/FPS FD-258 Fingerprint Cards for each individual applicant. • Emails page 2 of the Form I-9 Employment Eligibility Verification to the applicant which pro-

vides instructions on the required forms of identification.

B. The CSC POC, working with the applicant, completes and provides the following documents to the GSA 1PMF Security Office:

• Section 1 of the CIW, for each individual applicant. All items in Section 1 are required fields and

are to be typed. Photocopies will not be accepted. • Questions 1-13 of the OF 306, and if applicable, Question 16 for continuation purposes. Original

signature and date of each applicant are required on page 2, Question 17a. All required fields are to be typed.

• Questions 16a-16h on the Addendum to the OF 306, Item 16. • Section A Subcontractor name (If necessary), Section B and Section C of the Contractor Suitabil-

ity Request Transmittal Form. All items in Section A and B will be typed and Section C requires the original signature of the CSC POC.

• Two complete sets of DHS/FPS FD-258 Fingerprint Cards with original signatures of applicant and official taking fingerprints. All other blank fields are required.

• A copy of two documents that establish “proof of identity” as listed on page 2 of the Form I-9 Employment Eligibility Verification.

• The following requirements apply to U.S. Citizens born in a foreign country, foreign born citi-

zens, and dual citizenship holders.

If the applicant is a U.S. Citizen and was born in a foreign country, they must submit either a copy of the front page of their U.S. Passport or a copy of their U.S. Citizenship Naturalization Document with the documentation above.

If the applicant is a foreign born citizen and is now a U.S. Naturalized Citizen, they must submit a copy of their U.S. Citizenship Naturalization Document with the documentation above.

If the applicant is a foreign born citizen and resides in the U.S., they must submit a copy of their USCIS Alien Registration Document with the documentation above.

C. The CSC POC, working with each applicant, mails all required documents to the GSA 1PMF Security Office in separate sealed envelopes labeled with each applicant’s: last name; first name; middle name; last four digits of their Social Security Number; and the company name. The Contractor Suitability Request Transmittal Form will accompany these packets for all Temporary Contractors and will serve as a cover page for a maximum of (10) applicants being submitted for a (NAC) investigation.

Send to: GSA 1PMF Security Office, Room 1100 Thomas P. O’Neill, Jr., Federal Building

10 Causeway Street Boston, MA 02222-1077

GSA 1PMF Security Office will not accept faxed copies of any documents due to Privacy Act Regu- lations. All forms must be typed with original signatures. Hand-written forms will not be accepted. D. The GSA 1PMF Security Office reviews the forms to ensure that all required information has been



provided. If errors or omissions are detected, 1PMF will return all of the documents to the CSC POC, who will then forward these documents to the contractor for correction. The contractor upon correcting will resubmit to the CSC POC who will validate documents and perform transmittal as listed in paragraph 3 in this section.

E. If the forms are complete, 1PMF enters the request into the Regional Contractor Suitability database and delivers the forms to the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section for suitability processing.

F. The DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section shall complete the NAC suitability investigation as required under the GSA, DHS/FPS MOU. Upon completion of that investigation, the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section electronically forwards the results of the suitability determination to 1PMF. Suitability Determinations may be either:

• Favorable. The applicant is determined to be suitable to perform work in the building for up

to 180 calendar days.

• Unfavorable. The applicant is determined to be unsuitable to perform work in the building. This determination is frequently based upon an incongruity between the forms submitted by the applicant and the law enforcement checks.

• Illegible Fingerprints. The CSC POC needs to re-submit 2 new sets of the DHS/FPS FD-258

Fingerprint Cards with a copy of the applicant’s DHS/FPS illegible letter through the GSA 1PMF Security Office within 15 calendar days of the notification. Failure to resubmit within the above timeframe will result in an invalid application and the entire application process must begin again.

G. The GSA 1PMF Security Office emails the CO, COTR, and the CSC POC the result of the suitability determination. Upon notification of a Favorable Suitability Determination, each applicant will need to obtain a copy of their DHS/FPS Suitability Determination letter from their CSC POC. Each applicant will need to possess a copy of their Suitability Determination Letter, as well as, a form of personal photo identification (i.e. driver’s license) while working in GSA controlled facilities. Applicants may not begin work on-site prior to a Favorable Suitability Determination. An Unfavorable Suitability Determi- nation is final.

H. If work is to be performed after building operating hours, the GSA 1PMF Security Office must provide the local DHS/FPS Official the following information in writing:

• Building name and location of work (i.e.; room number, floor, and agency) • Name and address of Contractor Company • Last, First and Middle name of all Temporary Contractor(s) • Dates and times of activity.

(E-QIP) Long Term Contractor - U.S. or Naturalized Citizen or Non- U.S. Citizen legally residing in U.S. A non-federal employee performing work on Federal premises on a recurring basis for 181 calendar days or more. These individuals must receive a National Agency Check with Written Inquiries (NACI) Favorable Suitability Determination, if only the non-federal employee is residing in the U.S. for 3 or more consecutive years.



The process is as follows:

A. The GSA 1PMF Security Office provides the following to the CSC POC:

• Emails the DHS Contractor Information Worksheet (CIW) with sections 2 through 4 completed. • Emails the Contractor Suitability Request Transmittal Form with Section A completed. • Mails 2 original sets of the DHS/FPS FD-258 Fingerprint Cards for each individual applicant. • Emails page 2 of the Form I-9 Employment Eligibility Verification to the applicant which pro-

vides instructions on the required forms of identification.

B. The CSC POC, working with the applicant, completes and provides the following documents to the GSA 1PMF Security Office:

• Section 1 of the CIW, for each individual applicant. All items in Section 1 are required fields and

are to be typed. Photocopies will not be accepted. • Section A Subcontractor name (If necessary), Section B and Section C of the Contractor Suitabil-

ity Request Transmittal Form. All items in Section A and B will be typed and Section C requires the original signature of the CSC POC.

C. The CSC POC, working with each applicant, mails all required documents to the GSA 1PMF Security Office in separate sealed envelopes labeled with each applicant’s: last name; first name; middle name; last four digits of their Social Security Number; and the company name. The Contractor Suitability Transmit- tal Form will accompany the CIW(s) and will serve as a cover page for a maximum of (10) applicants being submitted for an E-QIP application invitation.

Send to: GSA 1PMF Security Office, Room 1100 Thomas P. O’Neill, Jr., Federal Building

10 Causeway Street Boston, MA 02222-1077

GSA 1PMF Security Office will not accept faxed copies of any documents due to Privacy Act Regu- lations. Allforms must be typed with original signatures. Hand-written forms will not be accepted.

D. DHS/FPS must:

• DHS/FPS will initiate and invite the applicant to complete the SF-85, via E-QIP, as well as, the

OF 306 with an email to the respective applicant email address as listed in Section 1 of their submitted CIW.

E. The applicant must:

• Complete the E-QIP Application. The applicant has 7 calendar days to login to the E-QIP

system and another 7 calendar days to complete the E-QIP application. If the applicant does not respond timely, the system will cancel the applicant’s invitation. If an application is terminated, the GSA 1PMF Security Office will email the CO, COTR/PM, and CSC POC of the termination and the entire application process must begin again. The applicant must: 1) complete the E-QIP application; 2) print the signature pages of the E-QIP application (CEL, REL,); 3) release the document within E-QIP; and 4) sign and date the last 2 signature pages. Questions 1-13 of the OF 306, and if applicable, Question 16 for continuation purposes. Original signature and date of each applicant are required on page 2, Question 17a. All required fields are to be



typed.

The applicant is required to submit signature pages and the OF 306 with original signatures; photocopies of signatures will not be accepted. The applicant should maintain a copy of the completed E- QIP SF-85 package for their records in case of clarifications.

• Two complete sets of DHS/FPS FD-258 Fingerprint Cards with original signatures of applicant

and official taking fingerprints. All other blank fields are required.

• A copy of two documents that establishes “proof of identity” as listed on page 2 of the Form I-9 Employment Eligibility Verification.

• The following requirements apply to U.S. Citizens born in a foreign country, foreign born citi-

zens, and dual citizenship holders.

If the applicant is a U.S. Citizen and was born in a foreign country, they must submit either a copy of the front page of their U.S. Passport or a copy of their U.S. Citizenship Naturalization Document with the documentation above.

If the applicant is a foreign born citizen and is now a U.S. Naturalized Citizen, they must submit a copy of their U.S. Citizenship Naturalization Document with the documentation above.

If the applicant is a foreign born citizen and resides in the U.S., they must submit a copy of their USCIS Alien Registration Document with the documentation above.

If the applicant claims dual citizenship, they must sign and date the DHS ICE Citizenship Declaration Form and submit with the documentation above.

F. The CSC POC, working with each applicant, mails all required documents to the GSA 1PMF Security Office in separate sealed envelopes labeled with each applicant’s: last name; first name; middle name; last four digits of their Social Security Number; and the company name. Ensure that all individual applicant documents being submitted are grouped together for a complete packet. The Contractor Suitability Re- quest Transmittal Form will accompany these packets for all (E-QIP) Long Term Contractor completed packets and will serve as a cover page for a maximum of (10) applicants being submitted for a (NACI) investigation.

GSA 1PMF Security Office will not accept faxed copies of any documents due to Privacy Act Regulations. All forms must be typed with original signatures. Hand-written forms will not be accepted.

G. The GSA 1PMF Security Office reviews the forms to ensure that all required information has been provided. If errors or omissions are detected, 1PMF will return all of the documents to the CSC POC, who will then forward these documents to the contractor for correction. The contractor upon correcting will resubmit to the CSC POC who will validate documents and perform transmittal as listed in paragraph 5 in this section.

H. If the forms are complete, 1PMF enters the request into the Regional Contractor Suitability database and delivers the forms to the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section for suitability processing.



I. The DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section shall complete the preliminary suitability portion, as required under the GSA, DHS/FPS MOU. Upon completion of that investigation, the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section electronically forwards the results of the suitability determination to 1PMF. Suitability Determinations may be either:

• Pre-Favorable. The applicant is determined to be suitable to perform work in the building up

to 180 calendar days. If the applicant has not received a Favorable 5 Year NACI by the end of the 180 calendar days, he/she may continue to work under the existing determination until further notice.

• Unfavorable. The applicant is determined to be unsuitable to perform work in the building.

This determination is frequently based upon an incongruity between the forms submitted by the applicant and the law enforcement checks. The applicant may appeal this decision within 30 calendar days. All appeals on Unfavorable Suitability Determinations are handled by DHS/FPS Headquarters Office in Washington, DC.

• Clarification. The applicant must contact the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication

Section within 15 calendar days to provide additional information in order to complete the background investigation for a suitability determination. Failure to respond within the above timeframe will result in an Unfavorable Suitability Determination.

• Illegible Fingerprints. The CSC POC needs to re-submit 2 new sets of the DHS/FPS FD-258

Fingerprint Cards with a copy of the applicant’s DHS/FPS illegible letter through the GSA 1PMF Security Office within 15 calendar days of the notification. Failure to resubmit within the above timeframe will result in an invalid application and the entire application process must begin again.

• Favorable NACI. Upon completion of OPM investigation and final Favorable Suitability De-

termination by DHS/FPS, the CO, COTR/PM, and CSC POC will receive notification from the GSA 1PMF Security Office of the applicant’s NACI clearance.

J. The GSA 1PMF Security Office emails the CO, COTR, and the CSC POC the result of the suitability determination. Upon notification of a Favorable Suitability Determination, each applicant will need to obtain a copy of their DHS/FPS Suitability Determination letter from their CSC POC. Each applicant will need to possess a copy of their Suitability Determination Letter, as well as, a form of personal photo identification (i.e. driver’s license) while working in GSA controlled facilities. Applicants may not begin work on-site prior to a Favorable Suitability Determination.

K. In the event the applicant receives an Unfavorable or Clarification Suitability Determination, the applicant is afforded an opportunity to explain and correct any inconsistencies by providing additional supporting documentation to the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section, which may or may not change the suitability determination.

L. Upon completion of a Pre-Favorable contractor suitability determination, the DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section forwards the package to OPM for completion of the NACI investigation.

M. Upon completion of its investigation, OPM reports the results of the investigation to the Region 1 DHS/FPS Contractor Suitability Adjudication Section, which makes the final suitability determination decision for the NACI and notifies both 1PMF and GSA Central Office of its decision. 1PMF emails the



CO, COTR, and the CSC POC the result of the final suitability determination.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)



SAFETY AND HEALTH 015460 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 015460 - SAFETY AND HEALTH PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Publication V2206; OSHA Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926). One source of these regulations is OSHA Publication 2207, which includes a combination of both Parts 1910 and 1926 as they relate to construction safety and health. It is for sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.

2. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (40 CFR, Part 61). 3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Final Rule (40 CFR Part 761) dated July 17,

1985.

C. Federal Standard (Fed. Std):

1. 313A Material Safety Data Sheets, Preparation and the Submission of.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 241 – 2013: Standard for Safeguarding Construction,

Alteration, and Demolition Operations E. International Code Council

1. International Building Code (IBC) 2012 2. International Fire Code (IFC) 2012

1.2 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION

A. This section is applicable to all work covered by this contract.

B. Owner’s Responsibility for Fire Protection: The owner shall designate a person who shall be

responsible for the fire prevention program and who shall ensure that it is carried out to completion. The fire prevention program manager shall have the authority to enforce the provisions of this and other applicable fire protection standards. The fire prevention program manager shall have knowledge of the applicable fire protection standards, available fire protection systems, and fire inspection procedures.

1.3 DEFINITION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Refer to hazardous and toxic materials/substances included in Subparts H and Z of 29 CFR



1910; and to others as additionally defined in Fed. Std. 313. Those most commonly encountered include asbestos, lead-based paint, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB'S), explosives, and radioactive material, but may include others. The most likely products to contain asbestos are sprayed-on fireproofing, insulation, boiler lagging, old plaster, vinyl asbestos tile, pipe covering and likely products to contain PCB's are transformers, light fixture ballasts, capacitors, voltage regulators, and oil switches.


A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet with the Contracting Officer

and his/her representative(s) prior to the start of work under this contract for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to the work to be performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss, in detail, the measures he/she intends to take in order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by the Contracting Officer, this meeting may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start of work under this contract. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work and the potential inherent hazards. The Contractor's principal on-site representative(s), the general superintendent and his/her safety representative(s) shall attend this meeting.

B. Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with and handling of hazardous

materials, the disturbance or dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or the disposal of hazardous materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of 29 CFR 1926/1910 and 40 CFR 761. Work involving the disturbance, dismantling of asbestos or asbestos containing materials; the demolition of structures containing asbestos; and/or the disposal and removal of asbestos, shall also comply with the requirements of 40 CFR, Part 61, Subparts A and M. All work shall comply with applicable state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, bring the conflict to the attention of the Contracting Officer for determination.

C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for

compliance with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel during the execution of work, and shall hold the Government harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her employees or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or death.

D. Fire Safety: Fire safety during construction and renovation projects shall comply with the

requirements in the International Building Code (IBC), International Fire Code (IFC), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 241.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with the requirements of the Constructions Contract Clauses,

Division 01 Section "Submittals" and the individual sections specifying the work.

B. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the Contractor or subcontractors submit to their insurance carriers, shall be forwarded through the Construction Engineer to the Contracting Officer as soon as possible, but in no event later than seven (7) calendar days



after the day the accident occurred.

C. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off site, submit copies of permits from applicable, Federal, state, or municipal authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been disposed in accordance with applicable regulations.

D. Fire Safety Program: An overall construction or demolition fire safety program shall be developed.

1. All of the following items shall be addressed in the fire safety program:

a. Good housekeeping b. On-site security c. Fire protection systems d. For construction operations, installation of new fire protection

systems as construction progresses e. For demolition operations, preservation of existing fire protection

systems during demolition f. Organization and training of an on-site fire brigade g. Development of a prefire plan with the local fire department h. Rapid communication i. Consideration of special hazards resulting from previous

occupancies j. Protection of existing structures and equipment from exposure

fires resulting from construction, alteration, and demolition operations

E. Other Submittals: If agreed to in writing at the safety meeting, other submittals shall be

required. One such submittal which may be included is a plan of action for handling hazardous materials, which shall contain the following:

1. Number, type, and experience of employees to be used for the work. 2. Description of how applicable safety and health regulations and standards are to be

met. 3. Type of protective equipment and work procedures to be used. 4. Emergency procedures for accidental spills or exposures. 5. Procedures for disposing of or storing the toxic/hazardous materials. 6. Identification of possible hazards, problems, and proposed control mechanisms. 7. Protection of public or others not related to the operation. 8. Interfacing and control of subcontractors, if any. 9. Identifications of any required analyses, test demonstrations, and validation

requirements. 10. Method of certification for compliance.

The above requirements shall not limit or supersede requirements that may be specified elsewhere in this specification, or requirements of regulatory authorities having jurisdiction for the handling and disposal of hazardous materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT



A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar items used by the Contractor in

the execution of work shall comply with the applicable regulations. 2.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Refer to Sections 020800 Asbestos Abatement and 020900 Lead Removal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STOP WORK ORDERS

A. When the Contractor or his/her subcontractors are notified by the Contracting Officer's

representative(s) of any noncompliance with the safety provisions of the contract and the action(s) to be taken, the Contractor shall immediately, if so directed, or within 24 hours after receipt of a notice of violation, correct the unsafe or unhealthy condition. If the Contractor fails to comply promptly, all or any part of the work being performed may be stopped by the Contracting Officer or his/her representative(s) with a "Stop Work Order." When, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer or his/her representative(s), satisfactory corrective action has been taken to correct the unsafe and unhealthy condition, a start order will be given immediately. The Contractor shall not be allowed any extension of time or compensation for damages by reason of or in connection with such work stoppage.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building

occupants, or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or building occupants shall include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor working under his/her direction.

B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials, scraps, and trash in a manner likely

to present a hazard to the public or building occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous qualities is prohibited.

C. Obstructions: No corridor, aisle, stairway, door, or exit shall be obstructed or used in such a

manner as to encroach upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by the public or building occupant, or to present unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or building occupant.

D. Work shall not be performed in any area occupied by the public or Federal employees unless

specifically permitted by the contract or the Contracting Officer and unless adequate steps are taken for the protection of the public or Federal employees.

E. Wherever practicable, the work area shall be fenced, barricaded, or otherwise blocked off

from the public or building occupants to prevent unauthorized entry into the work area.

F. Alternate Precautions: When the nature of the work prevents isolation of the work area and the public or building occupants may be in or pass through, under or over the work area, alternate precautions such as the posting of signs, the use of signal persons, the erection of



barricades or similar protection around particularly hazardous operations shall be used as appropriate.

G. Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare such as a

sidewalk, lobby, or corridor, the thoroughfare shall be closed, if possible, or other precautions taken such as the installation of screens or barricades. When the exposure to heavy falling objects exists, as during the erection of building walls or during demolition, special protection of the type detailed in 29 CFR 1910/1926 shall be provided.

H. Fences and barricades shall be removed upon completion of the project, in accordance with

local ordinance and to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer or his/her representative(s).



PRODUCTS 016320 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 016320 - PRODUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: Refer to clause, "Materials and Workmanship" of the Contract Clauses. Unless otherwise specifically provided in this contract, reference to any equipment, material, article, or patented process, by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, the Contractor may, at his option, use any equipment, material, article, or process which, in the judgment of the Contracting Officer, is equal to that named.

B. Definitions: "Products" is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work,

regardless of whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products. "Materials" is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed or applied to form units of work. "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.). Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in Contract Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," "furnishings," "special construction," and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

C. Standards: Refer to Division 01 Section "Definitions and Standards" for applicability of

industry standards to products of project, and for acronyms used in text of specification sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall comply with the requirements of the Construction Contract Clauses, Division

01 Section "Submittals" and the individual sections specifying the work.

B. Requests for Substitutions: Requests for substitutions shall be treated as a contract change and shall be subject to clauses "Changes" and "Equitable Adjustments" in General Conditions. Submit 5 copies, fully identified for product or method being replaced by substitution, including related specification section and drawing number(s), and fully documented to show compliance with requirements for substitutions. Include product data/drawings, description of methods, samples where applicable, Contractor's detailed comparison of significant qualities between specified item and proposed substitution, statement of effect on construction time and coordination with other affected work, cost information or proposal, and Contractor's statement to the effect that proposed substitution will result in overall work equal-to-or-better-than work originally indicated.



C. Labels and Listings: Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to requirements of the standards of organizations such as American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), American Gas Association (AGA), American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), Air Diffusion Council (ADC), Sheet Metal and air-conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA), and Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) or other organizations that use a label or listing as a method of indicating compliance, submit proof of such conformance to the Contracting Officer for approval. The label or listing of the specified organization will be acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may submit a notarized certificate from a nationally recognized testing organization, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services and approved by the Contracting Officer, stating that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization's standard or code. For materials whose compliance with organizational standards or specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish a notarized certificate from the manufacturer stating that the material complies with the applicable referenced standard or specification.

D. Work Related Submittals: Contractor's submittal of (and Architect's/Engineer's acceptance of)

shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof.


A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, and subject to the

restrictions of the Buy American Act, provide products, materials or equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source.

B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for Contractor's

selection of a product or material, select an option which is compatible with other products and materials already selected (which may have been from among options for those other products and materials). Total compatibility among options is not assured by limitations within Contract Documents, but must be provided by Contractor. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product/material selections.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING

A. General: Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft and protect against damage from climatic conditions. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide delivery/installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss. Damaged or defective items, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer shall be replaced at no cost to the Government.

1.5 WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES)



A. General: The warranty and guarantee provisions of the Contract Clauses apply to all work of the contract, including but not limited to, the following specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections of Divisions 02 through 33 of these specifications:

1. Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed by

Contractor for a defined portion of the work, and, where required, countersigned by Subcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor.

2. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by Contract Documents, to be provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work, regardless of whether manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special project warranty as a direct result of Contract Document requirements.

3. Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required by Contract Documents (other than as specified in this Section); but which is available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of product has published warranty in connection with purchases and users of product without regard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty.

B. Refer to individual sections of Divisions 02 through 33 for the determination of units of work

which are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specific requirements and terms of those warranties (or guarantees), in excess of what the Contract Clauses require.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCES

A. General: The compliance requirements for individual products, as indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic, descriptive, performance, prescriptive, compliance with standards, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

B. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by

Contract Document requirements, and governing regulations, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects. Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following for various indicated methods of specifying:

1. Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where only compliance with an imposed standard,

code or regulation is required, selection from among products which comply with requirements including those standards, codes and regulations, is Contractor's option.

2. Performance Requirements: Provide products which comply with specific performances indicated, and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual certification for application indicated. Overall performance of a product is implied where product is specified with only certain specific performance requirements.

3. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced in accordance



with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components, and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finishing, testing and similar operations in manufacturing process.

4. Visual Matching: Where matching with an established sample is required, final judgment of whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorily is the Contracting Officer's.

5. Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirements include "....as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures...." or words of similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product (complying with requirements) is Contractor's option and subsequent selection of color, pattern and texture is the Contracting Officer's selection.

C. General Requirements for Electrical Work: The following applies to electrical work unless

otherwise specified:

1. Comply with NEC. 2. Conduits, Wiring and Equipment. Arrange generally as indicated. Any change resulting

in a savings in labor or materials shall be made only in accordance with a contract change order. Deviations are permitted only where necessary to avoid interferences and only after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted to and approved by the Contracting Officer.

3. Ratings. The motor horsepower and apparatus wattage ratings shown or specified are estimated values, and the corresponding sizes of feeders and other electrical equipment indicated to serve them are minimum sizes. Motors of greater horsepower and apparatus with larger wattage ratings may be furnished if necessary to meet the requirements of the various sections of the specification in which they are specified. Where larger motors or apparatus with larger wattage ratings are furnished, increase the capacity of the feeders and other electrical equipment serving them to correspond, at no additional cost to the Government, for each case in which the Contracting Officer determines that apparatus meeting the specification requirements and requiring a horsepower or wattage not exceeding that which is specified is available from two or more sources.

2.2 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide products which comply with the clause "MATERIALS AND

WORKMANSHIP" of the Contract Clauses, and which are undamaged and unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended use and effect.

1. Standard Products: Products shall be essentially the standard catalogued products of

manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such products and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification requirements. Equipment shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial and industrial use at least two years, or more if otherwise specified, prior to Bid opening; or in lieu thereof shall have been used and operated in a test installation which, in the opinion of the Contracting Officer, duplicate its field performance for the same period of time. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit evidence to this effect for his approval. When two units of the same class of equipment



are required, these units shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the system need not be the products of the same manufacturer.

2. Continued Availability: Products which, by nature of their application, are likely to be needed at a later date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, shall be current models for which replacement parts are available.

2.3 LABELS AND NAMEPLATES

A. General: To the extent feasible and consistent with the following requirements pertaining to the appearance of the finished building, wherever a product is required to comply with a specified standard, grade, class, or type, a permanent label to this effect shall be applied to the product. Where this is not feasible because of the nature of the product, the label shall be on or inside of each container.

B. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required approval labels and operating data, do

not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of the work.

C. Labels: Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for

observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

D. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or

power-operated equipment. Indicate manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, speed, ratings and similar essential operating data. Locate nameplates on an easily accessed surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 016320


REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 016350 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 016350 - REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT and all Sections within DIVISION 01 which are

hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for

information (RFIs) made after award of Contract. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 013000 – Submittal Procedures: Contractor’s Construction Schedule and Schedule of

Submittals.

B. Section 016320 – Product Requirements: Administrative and procedural requirements for requests for substitutions.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Requests for Information (RFI): Requests for additional information by Contractor on products,

materials, equipment, construction details and other requirements of the Contract Documents after award of Contract are considered “Requests for Information”.

B. Unreasonable RFI: An “Unreasonable RFI” is any RFI which can be answered with

information contained within the Contract Documents without additional information. 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Request for Information Submittal: Request for Information shall be submitted in WORD

format on a form approved by the Contracting Officer. Incomplete RFIs and RFIs not complying with requirements of this section will be returned to the Contractor with “No Action Taken” by the Contracting Officer.

1. Submit properly completed RFI forms to the Contracting Officer with copies to Architect

and appropriate Consulting Engineers. 2. Before submitting RFI, have every supplier and subcontractor involved or affected by the

RFI review it for comment.


REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION 016350 - 2 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

3. Include the following minimum information: a. Work affected by RFI by listing pertinent Drawing Numbers and Specification

paragraph numbers. b. Pertinent field conditions and as-built conditions on sketches attached to RFI form. c. If RFI addresses a conflict in Contract Documents, describe dimension, materials

and data necessary to enable Architect to formulate a response. d. Include a suggested solution and state if the solution will affect Construction Time

or Construction Cost.

B. Contracting Officer’s Action: 1. Contracting Officer may request additional information or documentation as necessary

for evaluation. 2. Contracting Officer will respond with reasonable promptness in writing and may issue a

clarification to the Contract Documents, (in accordance with General Conditions of the Contract, and Supplementary Conditions.

C. RFI Log: The Contractor shall maintain a complete and comprehensive log of all RFIs. Each

RFI shall have a unique identity. Each RFI shall ask only one question. The RFI log shall include the unique RFI Identity, a brief keyword description of the question or topic, the date the RFI was issued, the date the RFI response was received, and a column indicating whether the RFI was considered “unreasonable” by the Contracting Officer.





PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017000 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 017000 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. General: This section includes general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 02 through 33. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion," and therefore may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which have been noted as substantially complete at different dates.

1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. General: Prior to requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion (for either

entire work or portions thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request:

1. In progress payment request, coincident with or first following date claimed, show either 100% completion for portion of work claimed as "substantially complete," or list incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these contract documents.

2. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instructions to Government's operating/maintenance personnel. Discontinue (or change over) and remove from project site temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mockups not approved to remain in place as part of completed work, and similar elements.

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer will either

proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, the Contracting Officer will note substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance.

1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. General: Prior to requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Provisions and Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request:

1. Submit final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not

previously submitted and accepted. 2. Submit copy of final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating

that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.



3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents.

4. Submit record as built drawings, final project photographs, property survey, and similar final record information.

5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Government.

6. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to the Contracting Officer and advise Government personnel of change-over in security provisions.

7. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. 8. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Re-inspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been

completed, including punch-list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, the Contracting Officer will re- inspect the work. Upon completion of re-inspection, the Contracting Officer will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein.

Each record shall be certified by the Contractor and the Construction Engineer. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location accessible to the Contracting Officer for reference during normal working hours. Upon completion, turn record documents over to the Contracting Officer.

B. Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue-line or black-line) of contract drawings

(including amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set.

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change

orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable.

D. Record Shop Drawing, Product Data, Certifications and Laboratory Test Reports: Maintain

one copy of each approved shop drawing and product data submittal, product certification, and



laboratory test report and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications.

E. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the

Contracting Officer or his designated representative will meet with Contractor at site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the Government. Comply with the Contracting Officer's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery.

F. Progress and Final Photographs: For each building or structure under contract, provide the

following:

1. Four separate shots each month of black and white or color progress photographs in sharp focus approximately 8" X 10" mounted on 8-1/2" X 11" hardboard. Take on the first working day of each month (whether or not any work was done during the proceeding month). Take from points selected by the Construction Engineer and deliver sets plus the negatives to the Contracting Officer. Label each photograph with description (of what and from where taken), name and location of building, Contractor's name, type of photograph (progress, special, final), and date taken. Provide two sets of photographs.

2. Provide 6 copies of final color photographs when project is complete. Take when daylight is bright and sunny. They shall be produced with such artistic skill as to be suitable, in the Contracting Officer's opinion, for exhibition and reproduction. Take exterior photographs from two points of view, one showing the entire front elevation and one side, the other showing entire rear elevation and remaining side: the front elevation appearing approximately three times the width of the side. For buildings with courtyards or atriums, take photograph from two points of view, each showing two sides. Take two interior photographs, from points of view selected by the Contracting Officer, of each of the following rooms or spaces.

3. If progress photographs are not furnished within five days of the date when due or within five days after demand, the Contracting Officer will cause such photographs to be taken and the cost will be charged to the Contractor. Furnish photographs as soon as possible under the specified light conditions.

4. All negatives of all photographs shall become the property of the Government, and shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer together with the photographs.

5. Provide Digital Photographs (approximately 25 per day) taken 1 day each week to show contruction progress and new work being installed at the site. Photos to be emailed to contracting officer.

G. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for

requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the work. Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Turn over to the Contracting Officer prior to final acceptance.



1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals for each mechanical and electrical system

(except as otherwise specified), for each piece of equipment, and for other systems and components specified in the technical sections of the specification. Organize manuals into suitable volumes of manageable size, as approved by the Contracting Officer. Manuals shall have table of contents, and be assembled to conform to table of contents with tab sheets covering each subject. The instructions shall be legible and easy to read. Manuals shall be hard bound and sheets consistent in size; where oversize drawings are necessary they shall be folded in. The words "Operation and Maintenance Manual," the name and location of the building, and contract number shall appear on the cover.

B. Contents: Manuals shall include, but not be limited to, the following data:

1. Detailed description of each system and each of its components, including layout

showing piping, valves, controls and other components, and including diagrams and illustrations where applicable.

2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component.

3. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shut-down. 4. Procedure for starting. 5. Procedure for operating. 6. Shut-down instructions. 7. Installation instructions. 8. Maintenance and overhaul instructions. 9. Lubricating schedule, including type, grade, temperature range and frequency. 10. Emergency instructions and safety precautions. 11. Corrected shop drawings. 12. Approved product data. 13. Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable). 14. Copies of warranties. 15. Test procedures. 16. Performance curves and rating data. 17. Parts list, including source of supply, recommended spare parts, and service organization

convenient to building site. 18. Name, address, and telephone number of each subcontractor who installed equipment and

systems, and local representative for each type of equipment and each system. 19. Other pertinent data applicable to the operation and maintenance of particular systems or

equipment and/or other data specified in technical sections of the specification. 20. Note: Manuals for the system as a whole will not be required for outside water

distribution systems or sanitary sewer systems or for conventional sewage treatment plants or water treatment plants.

C. Submittal: Provide Contracting Officer with 2 copies of manual prior to the time that system or

equipment tests are performed, and 3 additional copies 90 days before start of operation by the Government or any instruction period specified.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL

A. Where instructions to maintenance personnel are specified in other sections furnish, without additional expense to the Government, the services of competent instructors, who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, and operation of the systems and equipment to designated maintenance personnel.

B. Each instructor shall be familiar with all parts of the system on which he is to give instruction

and shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever practical and available.

C. Unless otherwise required or approved, give instruction during the regular work week after the

equipment has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. Where significant changes or modifications in equipment are made under the terms of the guarantee, provide additional instruction as may be necessary to acquaint the operating personnel of the changes or modifications. When more than four man-days (32 hours) of instruction are specified, approximately half of the time shall be classroom instruction and the other half with the equipment or system.

D. Utilize the maintenance manual for the system or equipment as a text for instruction.

Instruction shall include a review of the maintenance manual.

E. Upon completion, obtain written acknowledgment from the Contracting Officer that the required instruction was completed.

3.2 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Post operating instructions approved by the Contracting Officer for each system and each

principal piece of equipment for the use of operation and maintenance personnel. Include wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the entire system including equipment, piping, and valves, and control sequence, framed under glass or approved laminated plastic and posted where directed by the Contracting Officer. Printed or engraved operating instructions for each principal piece of equipment including start-up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, shut-down, safety precautions, procedure in the event of equipment failure, and any other necessary items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of the unit shall be attached to or posted adjacent to the piece of equipment. Operating instructions exposed to the weather shall be made of weather-resisting materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.

3.3 FINAL CLEANING



A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operation. The following is required in

addition to special cleaning specified in technical sections.

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished

condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

4. Wipe surfaces of equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. 5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums,

shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. 6. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean. 7. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. 8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting

from water exposure. 9. Clean food service equipment, if present, to a condition of sanitation ready and

acceptable for intended food service use. 10. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 11. Clean project site, including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign

substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface.

B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Contracting Officer,

remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously completed work during remainder of construction period.

C. Pest Control: Engage a specialist to make a final inspection of project, and to rid project of

rodents, insects, and other pests.

D. Completion of contract: The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, when all work and services required under this contract are complete.



EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017001- 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 017001 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Attention is directed to the CONTRACT and all Sections within DIVISION 01 which are hereby made a part of this Section of the Specifications

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes certain general procedural requirements governing the Contractor's

execution of the Work, including, but not limited to laying out the work, general installation of products, correction of defective work, and cleaning.

B. Substitutions: Changes in methods of construction required by the Contract Documents

proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract shall comply with the procedures and conditions specified for Substitutions in the Construction Contract Clauses and Division 01 Section 016320 "Product Requirements".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Surveyor Qualification Statement: Submit for review a statement attesting to previous

experience from the land surveyor or professional engineer engaged to lay out the Work. Include list of completed projects, with project names and addresses, and names and addresses of architects and owners.

B. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer certifying

that the location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements indicated.

C. Final Property Survey: Submit 3 copies of the final property survey plus a digital format file acceptable to the Architect and Owner.

D. Field Correction Requests: Immediately upon discovery of the need to deviate from

requirements of the Contract Documents, submit a field correction request to the Contracting Officer's Representative for review. Include a detailed description of the problem encountered, together with recommended changes and detailing the reasons for deviating from the Contract Documents.

E. Manufacturer's Field Services Submissions: Where product manufacturers are required by the

individual sections of the Specifications to provide qualified personnel to observe conditions of surfaces or other project conditions, installation or workmanship, start up or adjustment of equipment, tests or other activities, and to initiate instructions when necessary, the following shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer's Representative:

1. Qualifications: For approval, submit qualifications of observer at least 30 calendar days



in advance of scheduled activities. 2. Report: For information, submit report of activities and findings within 15 calendar days

after the successful execution of the specified work. Include logs and other documented data where applicable.

F. Test Results: submit the results of the destructive testing of the floor slab to the Contracting

Officer Representative for review.


A. Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor or qualified professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is located, to perform required land-surveying services.

B. Workmanship Standards: Initiate and maintain procedures to ensure personnel performing the

work are skilled and knowledgeable in the methods and craftsmanship needed to produce the required levels of workmanship in the completed work. Remove and replace work that does not comply with workmanship specified and standards recognized in the construction industry for the applications indicated. Remove and replace work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or replacement of other work.

1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply

with manufacturer's applicable installation instructions and recommendations to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents.

2. Specialists: Where the individual sections of the specifications require specialists to perform the work, comply with the requirements specified in the Construction Contract Clauses. The assignment of a specialist shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with applicable regulations, union jurisdictional settlements or similar conventions, and the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire requirements remains with the Contractor.

3. Minimum Quality and Quantity: The quality level or quantity shown or specified shall be the minimum required for the work. Except as otherwise indicated, the actual work shall comply exactly with that minimum or may be superior to that minimum within limits acceptable to the Contracting Officer's Representative. Specified numeric values are either minimums or maximums as indicated or as appropriate for the context of the requirements.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Identification: Existing benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points are indicated on the Drawings.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points and similar reference



points before beginning Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval of the Contracting Officer's Representative. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate benchmarks or control points to the Contracting Officer's Representative before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original control points.

C. Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in

relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered notify the Contracting Officer's Representative promptly.

D. Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data

established by survey control points.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Make the log available for reference by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

F. Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction.

1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping. 2. Furnish location data for work related to the Project which must be performed by public

utilities serving the Project site.

G. Layout the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must conform. 4. Check the location, level and plumb of every major element as the work progresses. 5. Notify the Contracting Officer's Representative when deviations from required lines and

levels exceed allowable tolerances.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine applicable substrates and conditions under which the Work will be performed before



starting construction operations.

B. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered take corrective action before proceeding.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

B. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work.

C. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing

structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before

installing each product.

E. Verify space requirements of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. F. Destructive Testing: within two weeks of the Notice to Proceed, the contractor shall perform site

investigative work under the supervision of the contracted structural engineer to determine the floor slab composition, specifically to determine the thickness of the topping slab. The results of this investigation will aid the contractor in determining the electrical conduit routing approach.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately.

1. Make vertical work plumb and horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and to maximize ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas.

B. Install products at the time and under conditions that will produce satisfactory results.

1. Maintain temperature, humidity and other weather controls for best performance. 2. Isolate units of noncompatible work to prevent deterioration.

C. Conduct construction operations so that no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations

or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

D. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful levels of noise.

E. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to withstand stresses, vibration and physical distortion. Anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.



1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by the Contracting Officer's Representative.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

F. Joints: Make like joints of uniform width within contiguous surfaces. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for a uniform and balanced visual effect.

G. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

H. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing the significant real property

features of the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by the surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

3.5 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

B. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and proper adjustment of operating equipment.

C. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

D. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if the surfaces cannot be

repaired without visible evidence of repair.

E. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired to operate properly.

F. Remove and replace chipped, scratched or broken surfaces.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Maintain the project work areas free of waste material and debris.

B. Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution

of the work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the work, broom- or vacuum-clean the

entire work area.

C. Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or fabricator of the product installed, using only the cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and will not damage exposed surfaces.

D. Remove debris from concealed spaces prior to enclosing the space.



E. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and

deterioration at the time of project completion.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed work from soiling and damage.

B. Protective Coverings: Provide appropriate protective coverings for work that might be damaged by subsequent operations. Maintain protective coverings in place until project completion.



FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK 017350 - 1


SECTION 017350 - FIRE PREVENTION PRECAUTIONS FOR HOT WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section applies to safeguards to be observed in performing hot work, including welding, soldering, brazing and other operations where open flames or implements utilizing heat are used.

B. Hot Work Permit: Comply with NFPA 51B. Do not conduct operations involving the use of open-flame, electrical arc equipment, or flammable substances until a permit for welding, cutting, and burning has been issued by the Government.

1. The Contracting Officer will identify and delineate the responsibilities of the Government Permit Authorizing Individual prior to the Preconstruction Meeting.

C. Hot work permit duration shall be one work shift unless otherwise agreed to by the Government and Contractor

1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Prior to operations, the site shall be visited and suitable locations established for the portable equipment storage during non-working hours. The responsible supervisor for the contractor and the Government shall confer and decide upon such locations, with the Government decision being final.

B. The Contractor shall ensure that operations involving the use of open-flame, electrical arc equipment or flammable substances are not conducted until a permit for welding, cutting, and burning has been completed, signed and issued by the Building Manager.

C. The Building Manager must approve the location of asphalt kettles for roofing work. Location shall be per prevailing code.

D. Prior to commencing operations, a positive determination shall be made that it is impractical to conduct the hot work in a shop area or outside of the building. Coordinate suitable locations for hot equipment operations agreeable to the Contracting Officer’s Representative.

E. Flammable and combustible liquids shall be drained from tanks and machinery reservoirs in a safe manner and removed from the building immediately. Particular attention shall be paid to the removal of residue and sludge accumulations if hot work operations are involved.

1.3 NOTIFICATON




A. The Contractor shall notify GSA of the area of operations for each day and of all subsequent changes that occur.

B. The Contractor shall notify GSA of all locations where hot work has been performed not less than 30 minutes or more than 90 minutes after work is completed or stopped for the day.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before starting operations, the Contractor shall furnish trained personnel to provide fire watches for locations where hot work is to be performed. One fire watcher may observe several locations in a relatively small contiguous area if approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative. Contractor shall furnish suitable type, fully-charged, operable portable fire extinguisher to each fire watcher.

1. The Contractor shall provide fire watchers who know how to operate the fire extinguisher, how to turn on a fire alarm and how to summon the fire department.

B. Before starting operations, take suitable precautions to minimize the hazard of a fire communicating to the opposite side of walls, floors, ceilings and roofs from the operations.

3.2 SAFETY MEASURES

A. Hot work shall not be done in or near rooms or areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. A combustible gas indicator (explosimeter) test shall be conducted to assure that each area is safe. The Contractor is responsible for arranging and paying for each test.

B. Insofar as possible, the Contractor shall remove and keep the area free from all combustibles, including rubbish, paper and waste within a radius of 25 feet (7.62 m) from hot operations.

1. If combustible material cannot be removed, the Contractor shall furnish fireproof blankets to cover such materials. At the direction of the Building Manager or Contracting Officer's Representative, floors, walls, and ceilings of combustible material shall be wetted thoroughly with water before, during, and after operations sufficiently to afford adequate protection.

2. Where possible, the Contractor shall furnish and use baffles of metal or gypsum board to prevent the spraying of sparks, hot slag and other hot particles into surrounding combustible material.

C. The Contractor shall prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors, and holes and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings and roofs.




D. Cylinders of gas used in hot work shall be placed a safe distance from the work. The Contractor shall provide hoses and equipment free of deterioration, malfunction and leaks. Suitable supports shall be provided to prevent accidental overturning of cylinders. All cylinder control valves shall be shut off while in use with the gas pressure regulator set at 15 psi (103 kPa) or less.

E. When hot work operations are completed or ended for the day, each location of the day=s work shall be inspected by the Contractor 60 minutes after completion of operations to detect for hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper housekeeping is maintained. Contractor shall cleanup the area of work at the end of each shift or workday.

F. Where sprinkler protection exists, the sprinkler system shall be maintained without interruption while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to automatic sprinkler heads, gypsum board sheets or damp cloth guards may be used to shield the individual heads temporarily. The heads shall be inspected by the Contractor immediately after hot work operations cease, to ensure all materials have been removed from the heads and that the heads have not been damaged.

G. Suitable type, fully-charged, operable portable fire extinguisher shall be available at all times during hot work operations.

H. If any of the above safeguards are not employed or are violated, the Government may verbally stop the Work followed by written notice until compliance is obtained. Such stoppage shall not relieve the Contractor form performing his work within the Contract period for the Contract price.



ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension.

C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

D. OSB: Oriented strand board.

E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal size or greater in least dimension.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.



B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Post-installed anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2grade lumber of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or

WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade;

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.



B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

D. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC). 2. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3 (2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.



I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

J. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

1. Comply with approved fastener patterns where applicable. Before fastening, mark fastener locations, using a template made of sheet metal, plastic, or cardboard.

2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler.

3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced. 2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board".


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time.

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft Faced <Insert drawing designation>: ASTM C665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Owens Corning.

2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II, Class 2. 1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. AGM Industries, Inc. 2. Gemco.

C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inchbetween face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Gemco.

E. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11273

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457106877










F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. AGM Industries, Inc. 2. Gemco.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C1320 and as follows:






a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wrap.



1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of building wrap at terminations, openings, and penetrations. Show details of flexible flashing applications.


A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.

B. Building Paper: Water-vapor-permeable, asphalt-saturated kraft building paper that complies with ICC-ES AC38, Grade D; except with water-resistance rating not less than 1 hour.

C. Building Wrap: ASTM E1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.




a. Dow Chemical Company (The). b. DuPont Safety & Construction. c. TYPAR.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms per ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).

3. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg when tested according to ASTM E2178.

4. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 5. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

D. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless otherwise indicated.

C. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.

D. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing

flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.







4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure

that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.

3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION

A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.



ASPHALT SHINGLES 073113 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Ridge vents. 4. Metal flashing and trim.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1. Asphalt Shingles: Full size.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle and underlayment product indicated, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.



C. Evaluation Reports: For high-temperature, self-adhering sheet underlayment, from ICC-ES or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that product is suitable for intended use under applicable building codes.

D. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For asphalt shingles to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft. of each type, in unbroken bundles.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated location protected from weather, sunlight, and moisture according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

C. Protect unused roofing materials from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.

D. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to prevent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Manufacturing defects.

2. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first five years nonprorated.

3. Wind-Speed Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will resist blow-off or damage caused by wind speeds of up to 100 mph 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Algae-Resistance Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor for 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

5. Workmanship Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: On warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt-shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for Class A fire resistance according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 by Underwriters Laboratories or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Three-Tab-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462/D 3462M, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing; with tabs regularly spaced.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. CertainTeed Roofing Corporation. c. GAF Materials Corporation. d. IKO. e. Owens Corning.

2. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Algae Resistance: Granules resist algae discoloration. 4. Impact Resistance: UL 2218, Class 4. 5. Color and Blends: As selected by GSA from manufacturer's full range.









2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Minimum of 40-mil- thick; with slip-resisting, polymer-film-reinforced or glass-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive; with release backing; cold applied; and evaluated and documented to be suitable for use for intended purpose under applicable codes by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. GAF Materials Corporation. c. Owens Corning.

2. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F according to ASTM D 1970/D 1970M.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch (19 mm) into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing.

1. Shank: Barbed. 2. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as

flashing.

C. Synthetic-Underlayment Fasteners: As recommended in writing by synthetic-underlayment manufacturer for application indicated.

2.5 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.

1. Apron Flashings: Fabricate with lower flange a minimum of 5 inches over and 4 inches beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and 6 inches up the vertical surface.







2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof-deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provisions have been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install lapped in direction that sheds water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 4. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches, and return vertically against sidewall not

less than 4 inches. 5. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and Other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond

penetrating element 18 inches, and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches.

6. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems."



B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface.

C. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip-edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.

D. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip-edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing.

3.4 ASPHALT-SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and recommendations in NRCA's "NRCA Guidelines for Asphalt Shingle Roof Systems."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt-shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with one-third-tab offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

E. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full-length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses.

F. Fasten asphalt-shingle strips with a minimum of five roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Where roof slope exceeds 21:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots after fastening with additional roofing nails.

2. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

3. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

H. Ridge Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.



3.5 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("the work") on the following project:

1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>. 2. Address: <Insert address>. 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>. 4. Address: <Insert address>. 5. Area of the Work: <Insert information>. 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date>. 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>. 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date>.

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant the work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of the work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain the work in a watertight condition.

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to the work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 100 mph; c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive

deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,

equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance

personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.

2. When the work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to the work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of the work.

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of the work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the alterations, but only to the extent the alterations affect the work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer



to perform the alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting the alterations, notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that the alterations would likely damage or deteriorate the work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty.

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of the change, but only to the extent the change affects the work covered by this Warranty.

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect the work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on the work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of the work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>.

1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature>. 2. Name: <Insert name>. 3. Title: <Insert title>.



PLASTIC SIDING 074633 - 1

SECTION 074633 - PLASTIC SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl siding.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking. 2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for weather-resistive barriers.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate siding installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.



1. For vinyl siding, include VSI's official certification logo printed on Product Data.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For vinyl siding including related accessories.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type, color, texture, and pattern required.

1. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. 2. 24-inch-wide-by-36-inch-high Sample panel of siding assembled on plywood backing. 3. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Sample of soffit. 4. 12-inch-long-by-actual-width Samples of trim and accessories.


A. Qualification Data: For vinyl siding Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of vinyl siding.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of vinyl siding required, from ICC-ES.



D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of product, including related accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Furnish full lengths of vinyl siding including related accessories, in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed.


A. Vinyl Siding Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs a VSI-certified Installer on Project.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with labels intact until time of use.

B. Store materials under cover.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including cracking, fading, and deforming. b. Deterioration of materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by manufacturer, of more than 4 Hunter color-difference units as measured according to ASTM D2244.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain products, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 VINYL SIDING

A. Vinyl Siding: Integrally colored product complying with ASTM D3679.

B. Vinyl Siding Certification Program: Provide products that are listed in VSI's list of certified products.

C. Horizontal Pattern: To match existing.

D. Vertical Pattern: To match existing.

E. Texture: To match existing.

F. Nominal Thickness: To match existing.

G. Minimum Profile Depth (Butt Thickness): To match existing.

H. Nailing Hem: Double thickness.

I. Finish: To match existing.

1. Colors: White, to match existing.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.

B. Vinyl Accessories: Integrally colored vinyl accessories complying with ASTM D3679 except for wind-load resistance.

1. Texture: To match existing.

C. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads and where indicated.

1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Factory-prime coating.

D. Fasteners:



1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate.

2. For fastening to metal, use ribbed bugle-head screws of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1/4 inch, or three screw-threads, into substrate.

3. For fastening vinyl, use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. Where fasteners are exposed to view, use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of vinyl siding and related accessories.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

1. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement.

B. Install vinyl siding and related accessories according to ASTM D4756.

1. Install fasteners for horizontal vinyl siding no more than 16 inches o.c.

C. Install joint sealants as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and to produce a weathertight installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.



PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1

SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.





B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal.



B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.




A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."



2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Specified Technologies, Inc. c. Tremco, Inc.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves.







2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants.

2.4 MIXING

A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.

1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.

B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.



JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1

SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.





B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.



B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.




A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.



B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.


a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company. d. Tremco, Inc.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

D. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.








3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish

to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.




A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Expansion/Seismic Joints or Firestop Systems.



JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.



A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following:

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Color shall be clear.

D. SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

E. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. GE Construction Sealants; SCS2700 SilPruf LM . b. Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikasil WS-290

2.2 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9399&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456930378&mf=&src=wd




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.



B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1

SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.

1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Flat door sections with sensor edge on bottom section. 2. Frame for paneled door sections; of each width of stile and rail required. 3. Panel for raised-panel door sections; not smaller than required to show raised-panel

profile.





B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of operation

cycles. c. Faulty operation of hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use; rust through. e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer.



1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.

1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without

evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width.

b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of the door height.

C. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Provide sectional doors that pass ASTM E1886 missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests according to ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 1.

2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Wood Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.4 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to ASTM E283 or DASMA 105.

D. R-Value: 4.5 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.

E. Wood Sections: As shown on drawings.

F. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.

G. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

H. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and outside, with cylinders.

J. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.



K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 25 or more cycles per hour and more than 90 cycles per day.

2. Operator Type: Manufacturer's standard for door requirements. 3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet or lower.

4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry. 5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type. 6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor.

a. Sensor Edge Bulb Color: Black.

7. Control Station: Where indicated on Drawings. 8. Other Equipment: Audible and visual signals.

L. Door Finish: 1. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Finish as selected by COR from manufacturer's full

range.

2.4 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 WOOD DOOR SECTIONS

A. Paneled Sections: Stiles and rails of clear, vertical-grain, straight, kiln-dried Douglas fir, West Coast hemlock, or Sitka spruce, not less than 1-3/4 inches thick. Form meeting rails to provide rabbeted, weather-resistant seal.

1. Panel Inserts: Tempered hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, smooth on two sides, complying with ANSI A135.4.

2. Glazed Panel Inserts: 6-mm-thick, clear float glass, complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality Q3, with removable glazing stops of same wood as stiles and rails.

B. Flush Sections: Construct flush wood door sections with top, bottom, and end closures of clear, vertical-grain, straight, kiln-dried Douglas fir, West Coast hemlock, or Sitka spruce. Provide wood blocking to receive hardware, end stiles, and frames for glazing, glued and doweled in place. Form meeting rails to provide rabbeted weather-resistant seal.

1. Core: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene or polyurethane board insulation or honeycomb core complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E84. Bond to facing.

2. Exterior Facing Material: 1/8-inch thick, tempered hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4 and smooth on one side.



3. Interior Facing Material: Wood, with indicated thickness.

C. Fabricate sections of mortise-and-tenon construction with waterproof glue and steel dowels, or of rabbeted construction with waterproof glue and steel dowels and pins.

D. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal galvanized-steel members as required to stiffen door and for wind loading.

E. Treat wood door members after machining with water-repellent preservative formulation according to WDMA I.S. 4.

F. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of warp, twist, deformation, and delamination.

G. Factory prime door sections with one coat of exterior primer compatible with field-applied finish, applied at a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.

2.6 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings, Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading.

1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, minimum G60 zinc coating. 2. Slope tracks at an angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs

when door unit is closed. 3. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without

sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device.

a. For Vertical Track: Continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and attached to wall with jamb brackets.

b. For Horizontal Track: Continuous reinforcing angle from curve in track to end of track, attached to track and supported at points by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.

B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts



and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is impossible.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch diameter roller tires for 3-inch wide track and 2-inch diameter roller tires for 2-inch wide track.

D. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up operated or emergency-operated door with galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.8 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system. 2. Keys: Two for each cylinder.

B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.9 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A229/A229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B. Weight Counterbalance: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of filled pipe weights that move vertically in a galvanized-steel weight pipe. Connect pipe weights with cable to weight-cable drums mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel.

C. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.

D. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1.

E. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.



F. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

G. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.

2.10 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.

B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard, and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 25-lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.

2.11 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with

NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.

1. Trolley: Trolley operator mounted to ceiling above and to rear of door in raised position and directly connected to door with drawbar.

2. Jackshaft, Center Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall above door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.

3. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall on right or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated.

1. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Phase: Single phase. b. Volts: 120. c. Hertz: 60.



2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

3. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

4. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

5. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators.

E. Limit Switches: Equip motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.

2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom section. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire configured device designed to interface with door-operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

3. Pneumatic Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure, push-button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.



J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

2.12 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Tracks:

1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart.

2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

D. Power-Operated Doors: Install automatic garage doors openers according to UL 325.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.



1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter.

D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.



DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Electrified door hardware.


1. Section 083613 "Sectional Doors"

C. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

D. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant.

E. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

F. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existing construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant.

2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for key control system.



d. Requirements for access control. e. Address for delivery of keys.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security

systems.

C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified, in manufacturer's standard size.

1. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed product, in each finish specified.

1. Sample Size: Full-size units or minimum 2-by-4-inch Samples for sheet and 4-inch long Samples for other products.

a. Full-size Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.

2. Tag Samples with full product description to coordinate Samples with door hardware schedule.

F. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule after or concurrent with submissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule.

2. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame.



b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule.

c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.

d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems.

e. Fastenings and other installation information. f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door

hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.

G. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of electrified door hardware.

1. Certify that door hardware for use on each type and size of labeled fire-rated doors complies with listed fire-rated door assemblies.

C. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule.


A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Warehousing Facilities: In Project's vicinity.



2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.

D. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below:

a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer.



1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable.


A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the ABA standards of the Federal agency having jurisdiction.

1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.

2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:

a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.

3. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch.

4. Adjust spring hinges so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 1.5 seconds to move to the closed position.

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule.

1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3 and on Drawings.

2.4 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.







2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES

A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch-thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete.

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Cast. 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing. 4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.

F. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Security Grade 2; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000.


a. Allegion plc. b. Best Access Systems; Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. c. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Hager Companies. e. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. f. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.










2.7 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.


a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. High-Security Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.30; Grade 1 permanent cores that are removable; face finished to match lockset.

B. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.

C. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.

2.9 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

1. Existing System:

a. Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. b. Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system.

B. Keys: Nickel silver.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation:

a. Notation: Information to be furnished by Owner.

2.10 OPERATING TRIM

A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; brass unless otherwise indicated.










a. Allegion plc. b. Hager Companies. c. Trimco.

2.11 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.


a. Allegion plc. b. Corbin Russwin, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Hager Companies. d. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.

2.12 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.



2.13 DOOR GASKETING

A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


a. Hager Companies. b. National Guard Products, Inc. c. Pemko Manufacturing Co.




















B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows: 1. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.

2.14 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch-thick bronze; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.



2.15 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.

2. Fire-Rated Applications:

a. Wood or Machine Screws: For the following:

1) Hinges mortised to doors or frames; use threaded-to-the-head wood screws for wood doors and frames.

2) Strike plates to frames. 3) Closers to doors and frames.







b. Steel Through Bolts: For the following unless door blocking is provided:

1) Surface hinges to doors. 2) Closers to doors and frames. 3) Surface-mounted exit devices.

3. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 4. Gasketing Fasteners: Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and

elsewhere as indicated.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.



1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood

Flush Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches.

E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period.

1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies above accessible ceilings.

1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door hardware.

G. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.




A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 70 degrees and so that closing time complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust each item of door hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Set No 1: Door 104 (Existing door hardware to remain) 1 – Card Reader Access:

1 – Electric Strike (Coordinate with Electrical)



Set No 2: Door 101 Garage Door Operator

2 – Keyed Access Pads (one to the interior and one to the exterior) (Coordinate with Electrical)



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim accessory indicated.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of trim accessory indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Continental Building Products, LLC. d. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific. h. United States Gypsum Company.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.












2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.


a. Fry Reglet Corporation. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.







3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC. b. Franklin International. c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Specified Technologies, Inc. g. United States Gypsum Company.

F. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.











PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.



I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with



vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile.

3. Level 5: All areas unless noted otherwise.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.

E. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.



1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 100 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.




A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Flexco. 2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 3. Roppe Corporation, USA. 4.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).

1. Style and Location: a. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Colors: Charcoal 123







2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.



C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.



1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.




A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Behr Process Corporation. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. Coronado Paint; Benjamin Moore Company. 4. Glidden Professional.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If








paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.



C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply



additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416- 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ansul Incorporated. b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company. e. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp. f. Potter Roemer LLC. g. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. h. Strike First Corporation of America.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Stored-Pressure Water Type : UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. nominal capacity, with water in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.

C. Pressurized, AFFF-Foam Type: UL-rated 3-A:20-B, 2.5-gal. nominal capacity, with AFFF foam in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.

D. Regular Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 10-B:C, 5-lb nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ansul Incorporated.












b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Larsens Manufacturing Company. e. Potter Roemer LLC. f. Strike First Corporation of America.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.








WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures” 2. Division 7 Section “Firestopping” 3. Division 9, Section “Painting” 4. Life safety review and analysis of passive fire protection, egress pathways and

impediments. 5. Construction quality control division 01450 6. Commissioning & acceptance testing

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Scope: Provide a complete wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system, and associated equipment, ready for operation.

B. Description of Work: The work includes modifying the layout and installation of an existing NFPA 13D wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system to extend fire protection into the East Garage.

C. Compliance: The entire wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system shall be designed in accordance with the specification. Any reference to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer or the third party fire protection engineer, P.E. with oversight by GSA Regional FPE. All material and equipment used shall be listed or approved by UL, FM or another nationally recognized testing agency approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer, for their intended use and service.

D. Design shall be performed by NICET level III or IV and certified by a FPE, PE.




A. General: Design automatic sprinkler systems in accordance with all required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13D, including all the Annexes, except where modified herein, by hydraulic calculations for a residential occupancy with uniform water distribution over the design area. Each system shall be designed per NFPA 13D.

1. General Design Area Sizes and Densities

a. There shall be no reduction in area for the use of quick response sprinklers.

B. Water Supply Information

1. The basement has three 300-gallon storage fire water storage tanks and a fire pump. The pump was sized for a demand of 30 gpm at 41.3 psi, which accounts for two sprinkler heads operating.

C. Sprinkler System Layout: Approved by GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer and designated representative (designated representative can be one of the following: design team FPEPE, commissioning FPEPE or 3rd party FPEPE).

D. Other Design Criteria: 1. Maximum protection area per sprinkler shall be per NFPA 13D unless noted otherwise. 2. Velocities in all piping shall not exceed 20 ft/sec (6.1 m/sec). 3. Interior pipe coatings are specifically prohibited where not listed for fire protection use. 4. Sprinklers are not required above the suspended ceiling in the Garage.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals to be in accordance with Division 1, Submittal Procedures unless otherwise indicated by this section.

B. Product Data: Submit two (2) bound sets of submittals to the Project Manager for each type of product indicated. Include furnished specialties and accessories. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer or the third party fire protection engineer, P.E. with oversight by GSA Regional FPE. Manufacturer's data shall be provided for all products listed in Part 2 of this specification and annotated to show the specific model, type and size of each item.

C. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems, submit two (2) set of drawings to the Project Manager that include all information as required by NFPA 13D, PBS P-100 and this specification. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm). Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer or the third party fire protection engineer, P.E. with oversight by GSA Regional FPE. Include plans, elevations, sections, hydraulic calculations with remote areas de-



noted/detailed, isometric diagram of sprinkler system riser piping showing all control valve locations, and attachments to other work.

1. Layout indicating details, plan view, elevations and sections of the system piping. Indicate

the location of sprinklers and piping in relation to the ceiling layout, showing pipe lengths and sizes.

D. Hydraulic Calculations. Submit name of hydraulic program and comply with the following: 1. Where a single riser supplies water to more than one floor or level, separate calculations

shall be performed for the hydraulically most demanding area of each floor or level served.

2. Minimum operating pressure of any sprinkler shall be according to NFPA 13D and appropriate UL listing or FM approval.

E. Verification of Qualification. Prior to installation, submit documentation, to the Project manager showing that the Contractor has successfully installed automatic fire suppression sprinkler systems of comparable size, type and design as specified herein or that the Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a Subcontractor having such experience. 1. The data shall include the names and locations of at least three installations where the

Contractor, or Subcontractor, installed such systems. 2. The Contractor, or Subcontractor, shall certify that each system has performed

satisfactorily for a period of not less than one year. 3. The Contractor of Subcontract shall submit the NICET/PE certification/license number

and expiration date.

F. As Built Drawings: 1. General: Prepare and submit to the Project Manager three (3) sets of detailed "As-Built

Drawings". The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall also include all information as required by NFPA 13D, PBS P-100 and this specification. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm). Submit these drawings within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system.

G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Submit test certification, to theProject Manager, for all pipe and fittings. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13D, PBS P-100 and this specification. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

H. Field Acceptance Testing & Commissioning: Provide certification letters and non-compliance issues to the GSA Regional FPE based on the FPE, PE who is hired to perform these tests on behalf of the Regional GSA FPE.


A. Qualifications:



1. Layout and hydraulic calculation shall be performed by a NICET Level III or IV Technician certified in Automatic Sprinkler Systems Layout and certified by a Registered Fire Protection Engineer.

2. Installation shall be performed by a licensed sprinkler contractor who is experienced in the layout and installation of automatic sprinkler systems (minimum 3 years) of comparable size and type.

3. Installer's responsibilities include layout, fabrication, and installation of sprinkler systems. Layout calculations shall be based on the fire pump test data provided.

4. Drawings shall be sealed or certified by a licensed Professional Fire Protection Engineer and be stamped by a NICET Level III or IV Technician certified in Automatic Sprinkler Systems Layout.

B. Applicable References: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the latest editions of the following codes and standards (including PBS P-100 and this specification):

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), including all amendments and annexes a. NFPA 13D, "Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in One- and Two-

Family Dwellings and Manufactured Homes”

2. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) a. “Fire Protection Equipment Directory"

3. Factory Mutual Global (FM) a. Approval Guide

4. American Standard for Testing Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A53/A53M, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless” b. ASTM A47/A47M, “Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings” c. ASTM A153, “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware” d. ASTM A234/A234M, “Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service” e. ASTM A733, “Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and

Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples” f. ASTM A795, “Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use” g. ASTM A865, “Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints”

5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) a. ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose” b. ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings” c. ASME B16.4, “Gray Iron Threaded Fittings”

6. American Welding Society (AWS) a. A5.8, “Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding”



b. D10.12/D10.12M, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe”

C. Guarantee. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and equipment provided under this contract against defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Government. Final Acceptance includes, but is not limited to, the receipt of as-built drawings, passing final acceptance testing, and operation & maintenance manuals. Contractor shall be able to provide qualified personnel to site within a two (2) hour time frame and be available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

D. Conflicts. The system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings, specifications and referenced publications. Any conflicts between these documents shall be brought to the attention of the Project Manager, and the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer.


A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities without prior approval of the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer, Construction Oversite FPE, PE and the facility’s Senior Property Manager:

1. Existing Sprinkler Equipment: Existing sprinkler equipment shall be left in-service as indicated in the contract drawings

2. When sprinkler interruption is necessary, a written plan for putting the system back into service shall be submitted to the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer, Construction Oversite FPE (3rd party FPEPE), and the facility’s Senior Property Manager.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 All products shall be UL listed or FM approved for Fire Protection Service unless specifically allowed otherwise by this specification.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Materials shall be steel, ductile iron, or copper.

2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A795, in NPS 2 in (DN 50) and smaller. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.



B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A795, Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Steel Couplings: ASTM A865, threaded.

D. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

2.4 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Use welded, threaded or grooved outlets only. 2. Mechanical fastened tees are not permitted. 3. Where welded outlets are used, cutouts shall be fastened to the pipe from which they are

cut.

2.5 SPRINKLERS

A. General Requirements: 1. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. 2. Sprinklers with O-rings are not permitted.

B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Listed residential sprinkler heads.

C. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.6 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated finish with set-screws.

2.7 HANGERS

A Materials available by product type. Provide materials to comply with location and application requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings and schedules. 1. Pipe rings - Malleable iron, carbon steel. 2. Clevis - Carbon steel. 3. Steel pipe clamps - Carbon steel, alloy, stainless steel. 4. Socket clamps - Carbon steel. 5. Beam clamps - Malleable/ductile iron, hardened steel, carbon steel, forged steel. 6. Structural attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron. 7. Ceiling plates/ceiling flanges - Plastic, cast iron, malleable iron.



8. Concrete inserts and attachments – Malleable iron, carbon steel; stainless steel body, fiberglass bars, polypropylene disc (iron cross design).

9. Rod attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron, forged steel. 10. Pipe supports - Carbon steel, cast iron. 11. Pipe shields and saddles - Carbon steel, alloy steel, stainless steel. 12. Pipe rolls - Cast iron, carbon steel. 13. Guides - Carbon steel; slides, carbon steel with PTFE slide plates. 14. Engineered hangers - Carbon steel, stainless steel, chrome molybdenum steel. 15. Powder driven studs – Not permitted

B. Finishes: Provide finishes to comply with location and application requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings and schedules. 1. Electro-plating galvanizing process per ASTM B633. 2. Hot Dipped galvanizing process per ASTM A153. 3. Epoxy paint. 4. Zinc-rich paint. 5. Copper 6. Standard primer shall meet Fed Spec TT-P-636.

2.8 SIGNAGE

A. Provide plastic signs for each valve and to identify hydraulic design. Signs shall have white lettering on a red background with holes for easy attachment. Enter pertinent data for each system on the hydraulic placard.

2.9 SPRINKLER CABINET

A. Provide spare sprinkler heads of all types and ratings installed as well as any special tools required for removal or replacement of the heads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer, third party FPE, PE and Design team FPE, PE before deviating from approved working plans.

B. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with tapered fittings, bushings shall not be permitted.



C. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13D. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13D.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated by this specification.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

3.3 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Temperature Rating: Install ordinary temperature sprinklers, unless modified herein the specification. Sprinklers installed in higher ambient temperature areas shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13D.

B. Sprinkler Guards: Provide mechanical guards as required to prevent mechanical damage in accordance with NFPA 13, and as follows: 1. All sprinklers installed below 7 ft. (2.1 m.)

C. Quick Response Sprinklers: 1. Install in all areas where listed for use and in accordance with NFPA 13D.

3.4 DRAINS

A. Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required by NFPA 13D, PBS P-100 and this specification. 1. All drain discharge outlets on the outside of the building shall be located no higher than 1

foot (0.3 meters) above grade level.



3.5 SIGNAGE

A. Securely attach identification signs to control valves, drain valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water flow switch. Where more than one sprinkler zone is provided, signs shall indicate the specific zone served by the valve.

3.6 FIRE RESISTING MATERIAL (also known as FIRESTOPPING or FIREPROOFING)

A. Firestop all holes for piping, or other penetrations which pass through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, vertical service shafts, or any fire-rated assemblies in accordance with Division 7, Firestopping. Existing holes through which new piping for this project passes shall be totally firestopped in a manner that restores the fire protection rating of the penetrated wall, floor, ceiling or other structure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections.

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13D 4. Test fire pump operations according to NFPA 13D

B. Coordination of Installation:

1. The Contractor shall coordinate this sprinkler system work with other trades to avoid con-flicts, assure system completion and testing within the project schedule and to assure a quality, workmanlike finished product. In occupied buildings the Contractor shall coordi-nate all work with the GSA Property Manager to limit the disruptions to government busi-ness and activities. This may mean altered scheduling, after hours work, and/or sequencing construction activities to avoid disruptions to occupants of the building.

2. Disruptions to existing automatic sprinkler systems shall be kept to a minimum or avoided. Sprinkler systems outside of the construction project shall be kept in service at all times in a method approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer.

3. Delineate phasing of construction to ensure that installations of new systems are expedited, and existing systems are kept in service until the replacement system is operational.

3.8 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Paint sprinkler pipe as required by Division 9, Painting.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Painting and finishing. 8. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.



G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.



B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. All piping shall be exposed. Install at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.



H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

J. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

K. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.



3.3 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING 231126 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 231126 - FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Storage containers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. LPG: Liquefied-petroleum gas.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:

a. Piping and Valves: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2. For Piping Containing Liquid:

a. Piping between Shutoff Valves: 350 psig unless otherwise indicated. b. Piping Other Than Above: 250 psig unless otherwise indicated.



c. Valves and Fittings: 250 psig unless otherwise indicated.

B. LPG System Pressure within Buildings: One pressure range. More than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping materials and specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing LPG piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging coating and protect from direct sunlight.

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing LPG Service: Do not interrupt LPG service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of LPG supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Contracting Officer no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of LPG service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of LPG service without Contracting Officer's written permission.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for LPG piping materials.

B. Schedule 40 Steel and wrought iron.

1. ANSI/ASME B36.10, Welded and Seamless Wrought-Steel Pipe.



2. ASTM A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.

3. ASTM A106, Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

C. Flexible Connector: Furnished with heater.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and UL 842.

1. CWP Rating: 250 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch

and smaller. 5. Valves 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG" indicated on

valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.



3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently

marked on valve body.

D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Conbraco Industries - Apollo Valves c. Watts Water Technologies

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Conbraco Industries - Apollo Valves c. Watts Water Technologies

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to







F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Watts Water Technologies

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


2.5 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES

A. Automatic Gas Valves: Furnished with appliance.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for LPG. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. To be provided by LPG supplier.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Zurn Engineered Water Solutions c. Watts Water Technologies

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.







7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by

authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig.

2.7 STORAGE CONTAINERS

A. To be provided by LPG Supplier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off LPG to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 to determine that LPG utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer.

C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

D. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on vaporizers, air mixers, regulators, and valves may be flanged or threaded to match the equipment.

E. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator.



3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.



Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Provide unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

S. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.

T. Provide strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Provide pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator.

V. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

W. Provide escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Provide manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

C. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.



3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install hangers for horizontal, copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel. d. Color: Gray.

B. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.



1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex with approved finish by architect. d. Color: Approved color by architect.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex with approved finish by architect. d. Color: Approved color by architect.

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections: Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 54 and NFPA 58 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain LPG equipment.

3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller outdoors shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller indoors shall be one of the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.



METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 233300 Air Duct Accessories.

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.


A. Field quality-control reports.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

E. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing



requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch-minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.



3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets. 10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 11. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 12. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

I. Install dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation.

K. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and

smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.

L. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.



B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

D. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B. 3. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors.



B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below.

B. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.

C. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.



2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in.



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Control dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Duct-mounted access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Duct accessory hardware.




A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.



C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. 4. Approved equal.

B. Frames: 1. Type: Channel 2. Material: Aluminum 3. 0.125-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

C. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Parallel-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel. 4. Blade Seal: Silicone.

D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Bearings:

1. Dual bearing with acetal inner sleeve, flanged outer bearing. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of

damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

F. Actuator: 1. 120 VAC. 2. Externally mounted. 3. Two position with spring return. Fail closed.

2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.










3. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. 4. Approved equal.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Approved equal.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. Elgen Manufacturing.















5. Approved equal.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 2. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

F. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.



G. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

H. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

I. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.



LOW-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS 235523.13 - 1

SECTION 235523.13 - LOW-INTENSITY, GAS-FIRED, RADIANT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes low-intensity, gas-fired, forced-draft radiant heaters.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of radiant heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: All warranty periods listed below are from date of Substantial Completion.

a. Burner Assembly: Three years. b. Combustion and Emitter Tubes: Two years. c. Heater Controls: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. CSA certified, with CSA Seal and certification number clearly visible on units indicating compliance with ANSI Z83.20/CSA 2.34.



B. UL listed and labeled, with UL label clearly visible on units indicating compliance with ANSI Z83.20/CSA 2.34.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 FORCED-DRAFT HEATERS


1. Detroit Radiant Products Company. 2. Sterling HVAC Products; a Mestek company. 3. Approved equal.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, indoor, overhead-mounted, electrically controlled, low-intensity, infrared radiant heating units using gas combustion. Heater shall include necessary factory-installed wiring and piping prior to field installation and startup.

C. Fuel Type: Design burner for propane gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site.

D. Burner Assembly:

1. Combustion-Air Inlet: Ducted horizontal to outdoors through sidewall with vent caps. 2. Ignition System: Direct spark with flame rod sensing capabilities.

E. Combustion Chamber: 4-inch-diameter, 16-gage, hot-rolled-steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-resistant external finish.

F. Emitter Tube: 4-inch-diameter, 16-gage, hot-rolled-steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-resistant external finish.

1. Tubing Connections: Stainless-steel threaded couplings. 2. 180-degree-bend emitter steel tubing with high-emissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-

resistant external finish.

G. Reflector: Polished aluminum, with end caps. Shape to control radiation from tubing for uniform intensity at floor level with 100 percent cutoff above centerline of tubing. Reflectors or entire heater shall accommodate rotational adjustment from horizontal to a minimum 30-degree tilt from vertical.

H. Gas Connector: Flexible stainless steel connector, furnished with heater.

I. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Refer to Drawings.






2.3 CONTROLS AND SAFETIES

A. Gas Control Valve: Regulated redundant 24-V ac gas valve that contains pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body.

B. Failure Safeguards: 100 percent shutoff of gas flow in the event of flame or power failure.

C. Blower motor shall be thermally protected and the motor’s impeller shall be balanced.

D. Prepurge of air control system prior to burner ignition.

E. Safety lockout of burner.

F. Blocked Vent Safety: Differential pressure switch in burner safety circuit to stop burner operation with high discharge or suction pressure.

G. No condensation shall form as a result of combustion in the combustion chamber or radiant tubes while at operating temperatures.

H. Control Panel Interlock: Stops burner if panel is open.

I. Indicator Lights: "Airflow-on" and "burner-on" indicator lights.

J. Thermostat: Single-stage, digital programmable wall-mounted type with 45 to 90 or 50 to 90 deg F operating range, LCD display, low battery indicator, and temporary program temperature setpoint override. Voltage compatible with heater. Provide memory backup batteries.

1. Control Transformer: Provide as necessary; integrally mounted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Installation: Install gas-fired, radiant heaters and associated gas features and systems according to NFPA 54 and NFPA 58.

B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using chain hanger kits and building attachments per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances for combustibles.

D. Gas Piping: Comply with Section 231126 "Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service.

1. Gas Connections: Connect gas piping to heaters according to NFPA 54 and NFPA 58.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to gas-fired, radiant heaters, allow space for service and maintenance.



F. Vent Connections: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

G. Electrical Connections:

1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

B. Gas-fired, radiant heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial-temperature set points.

B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency.

C. Program thermostat to provide occupied and unoccupied schedule as directed by the Contracting Officer.

END OF SECTION 235523.13


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 2000 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 2000 V and less.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


B. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

1. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2 and Type XHHW-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Interior Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exterior Branch Circuits: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.




A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Calibrated torque wrench. 3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation. d. Inspect for correct identification. e. Inspect cable jacket and condition. f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent

conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable. h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Surface raceways. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. B. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 2. Southwire Company. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 4. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.








1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

G. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.



K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: LFMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: LFMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

E. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, to maximum extent practicable, unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

F. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

I. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

J. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

L. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a



blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

N. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

P. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

R. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

S. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Straight-blade convenience, hospital-grade, and tamper-resistant receptacles. 2. GFCI weather-proof receptacles. 3. Toggle switches. 4. Wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems. 3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc. 4. Pass & Seymour: Pass & Seymour/Legrand.

B. BAS: Building automation system.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

E. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

F. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943

Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

1. Single pole toggle switches

2. Dual Circuit/step dimming toggle switches

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic, white.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Device Color:



1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pig-tailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large

enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.



6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify each receptacle and lighting switch with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

D. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.



3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

E. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 265116 - 1 PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

SECTION 265116 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Fixtures 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Luminaire supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards. 1. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

a. IESNA HB-10 (2011) Lighting Handbook 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

a. IEEE C2 (2002) National Electrical Safety Code 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70 (2014) National Electrical Code





1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each luminaire type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the luminaire as applied in this Project.


A. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1598.

C. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

D. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120/277 VAC.

E. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

2.2 LED Light Fixtures

A. General:

1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.

2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)-compliant.

3. LED Drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20 Celsius (-4 Fahrenheit)

c. Input Voltage: 120 – 277V (+/- 10%) at 60 Hz

d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection

e. Power Factor: greater than or equal to 0.95

f. Total harmonic distortion: less than or equal to 20%

g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15

4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements

b. Minimum CRI 80 and color temperature 3000K-3500K unless otherwise specified

in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE



c. Minimum rated life: 50,000 hours per IES L70

d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Exit signs shall match existing style exit signs. 2. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac. 3. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 4. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.

2.4 SUSPENDED, LINEAR anufacture rs: ubject to compliance with re quireme nts, provide products by one of t he following:

1. Columbia Lighting. 2. Cooper Lighting, an Eaton business. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Brands Lighting, Inc.

B. Ceiling mounted with two 5/32-inch- diameter aircraft cable supports adjustable to 120 inches in length.

C. Waterproof, enclosed and gasketed housing.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

C. Diffusers and Globes:






1. Prismatic acrylic. 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

D. Housings:

1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. White powder-coat finish.

E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.6 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish shall match luminaire.

B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them.

E. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

F. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaire Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each luminaire. Locate not more than 6 inches from luminaire corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each luminaire corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on luminaire. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the luminaire weight at a safety factor of 3.

G. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:

1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

H. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for wiring connections and wiring methods.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."




A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

B. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

1. Test for Emergency/Exit Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

C. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service:

1. Charge any emergency power units and batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test.



ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 280000- 1


SECTION 280000 - ANALOG ADDRESSABLE VOICE EVACUATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Scope: This work includes modifying the existing, analog/ addressable network voice evacuation fire alarm system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the Coburn-Gore LPOE. The system shall include all wiring, raceways, pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control equipment, alarm, and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, and all other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. A single or multiple fire alarm control panel is indicated with terminal cabinets at each floor at the supply riser location. Where remote fire alarm control units are needed, they shall be provided at a terminal cabinet location. Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit. Where remote fire control units are provided, equipment for notification appliances may be located in the remote fire alarm control units.

B. Extent of the Work: The system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings,

specifications and referenced publications. Any conflicts between these documents shall be brought to the attention of the design professional responsible for the job, the project manager, and the GSA Fire Protection Engineer.

C. Completion of Work. Upon acceptance by the Government all fire alarm equipment shall

be immediately placed in service and the system shall be monitored by a UL listed central station service.

D. Existing fire alarm equipment shall be maintained fully operational until the new

equipment has been tested and accepted by the Government. As new equipment is installed, it shall be tagged "NOT IN SERVICE" until the new equipment is accepted. All new equipment that has been placed in service, shall have tags removed immediately and tags stating “NOT IN SERVICE” shall be placed on existing equipment that is no longer in service until such equipment is removed from the building. The switchover from the existing equipment to the new equipment shall be sequenced as indicated on the drawings and in the specifications.

E. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new system by the Government, all existing

equipment (including conduit and wire) not connected to the new system shall be removed and all damaged surfaces shall be restored. The material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor.


A. Provide design, materials and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system, complete, conforming to NFPA 72 and PBS P100, except as otherwise or additionally specified herein.




B. Approved Equipment: Provide materials, equipment and devices that have been tested by

a nationally recognized testing laboratory, such as Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification. Equipment located outside the building envelope shall be listed for outdoor use.

C. Prior to performing any work, the Contractor responsible for the voice evacuation fire alarm system installation shall submit the following documentation in addition to those documents required elsewhere in this specification:

1. Their qualifications, the scope of work to be performed, and the materials to be

provided, including the names and qualifications of the installation contractor and the equipment supplier’s project manager who shall be in responsible charge during the entire project installation. Installation contractor’s qualifications shall include years in business and prior experience with installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied; and evidence that he/she has successfully installed analog/addressable automatic voice evacuation fire alarm systems of comparable size and type.

2. The manufacturer's technical representative's name and qualifications. Once

approved, the representative shall not be changed without approval in writing by GSA.

3. A schedule indicating the delivery dates of the equipment to be supplied;

installation sequence; time frame and the total amount of on-site technical assistance time (in man-hours per phase) that the supplier of the equipment has included in their bid to comply with this specification and GSA’s requirements; and projected demonstration test and final test/acceptance dates to meet GSA’s scheduled project completion dates.

4. Written confirmation of how the manufacturer/supplier plans to comply with

the performance operational design of the system and all information regarding the reliability, operation and servicing of the equipment to be supplied. The contractor shall furnish evidence that the fire alarm equipment supplier has an experienced and effective service organization which carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished. Should the contractor fail to comply with the service requirements of this section, the government will then have the option to make the necessary repairs and back charge the contractor without any loss of warranty or guarantee as provided by the contract documents.

5. A letter from the equipment manufacturer stating that the equipment to be

supplied is not at or near the end of its life cycle and that replacement components for all control equipment shall be available from the manufacturer for a minimum of fifteen (15) years from the date of final acceptance of this work by the Government.

D. Shop Drawings and Calculations: The shop drawings and calculations shall be prepared

by a technician that is certified NICET level III or IV, or a registered fire protection




engineer. This individual shall have an established office, which has been in existence for three (3) years. The person preparing shop drawings shall be responsible for compliance with applicable codes, this specification, and with the contract.

E. Installation Requirements: Installation shall be accomplished by an electrical or fire alarm contractor licensed to perform fire alarm installation work in the jurisdiction where the building is located with a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation of fire alarm systems. The supervision of installation and testing shall be provided by a certified NICET level III or IV technician who has been trained by the manufacturer and certified on the installation, maintenance, networking and programming of the product being installed, or a registered fire protection engineer.

This individual shall be the same person throughout the course of the project, unless written authorization is obtained from the Contracting Officer and have an established office, which has been in existence for three years within a 120 kilometer (75 mile) radius of Manchester, New Hampshire or is so located where the response to the project site can occur within 4 hours or less. This individual shall be on site each day that the fire alarm work is actively in progress and for the supervision and testing of the system. Factory engineers from the equipment manufacturer, thoroughly familiar and knowledgeable with all equipment utilized, shall provide additional technical support at the site as required by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer. The GSA Fire Protection Engineer may reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.

F. Warranty and Guarantees: All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the entire installation by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer. Final Acceptance includes, but is not limited to, successful final acceptance testing, the receipt of as-built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. On-site service during the warranty and guarantee period shall be provided within 48 hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within forty-eight (48) hours after notification.

G. Applicable Publications: Provide a system conforming to the requirements of the following publications including all amendments to these publications:

1. American National Standards Institute

a. S3.41 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal (2015)

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME):

a. A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (2016)

3. International Code Council (ICC):

a. International Building Code (2012) b. International Fire Code (2015) c. International Mechanical Code (2015)




4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) (2017) b. 72 National Fire Alarm Code (2016) c. 101 Life Safety Code (2015) d. 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems (2016) e. 90A Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilation Systems (2015) f. 241 Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and

Demolition Operations (2013)

5. Testing Services or Laboratories: Provide all fire alarm and fire detection equipment in accordance with the following publications from Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), or Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM):

a. UL 228 – Standard for Door Closers-Holders, With or Without Integral

Smoke Detectors (2006) b. UL 464 – Standard for Audible Signal Appliances (2016) c. UL 864 - Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm

Systems (2014) d. UL 1480 – Standard for Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and

Commercial and Professional Use (2016) e. UL 1971 – Standard for Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired

(2002) f. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory (2007) g. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory (2016) h. FM Approval Guide (2007)

6. U. S. General Services Administration a. PBS-P100 - Facilities Standards for the Public Buildings Service (2016)

1.3 EQUIVALENT TECHNOLOGIES

A. Nothing in this specification is intended to prevent the use of systems, methods, or devices of equivalent or superior quality, strength, fire resistance, effectiveness, durability, and safety over those prescribed in this specification. Technical documentation shall be submitted to the GSA Fire Protection Engineer to determine equivalency. The system, method, or device shall be approved for the intended purpose by the GSA fire protection engineer prior to being utilized. Systems, methods, or devices that are submitted for review after construction of the fire alarm system begins, may be summarily rejected due to contractual considerations and/or technical considerations.

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. The system shall be a complete, supervised, addressable, voice evacuation fire alarm

system conforming to NFPA 72, P100, IBC, except as otherwise or additionally specified in this section.




B. Two vertical network risers (i.e., supply and return interconnected network signaling line circuits Style 7 - Class A) shall be installed as remote as practicable from each other so that a single fire will not involve both risers. The two (2) vertical risers shall be protected by a minimum two (2)-hour rated enclosure or an approved two (2)-hour rated cable or system, not common to both vertical risers. The horizontal interconnection between the two (2) vertical risers at the top and bottom shall be protected by a minimum two (2)-hour rated enclosure, or an approved two (2)-hour cable or system, or an approved construction material having a two (2)-hour fire resistance rating.

C. CI cable shall be installed in EMT, IMC or rigid metal conduit for mechanical protection.

D. Provide a minimum of two (2) Style 4 Class B Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) per floor.

Provide a minimum of three (3) Class B Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) per floor if the gross floor area is greater than 2,415 square meters (26,000 square feet) but less than 4,830 square meters (52,000 square feet) gross area. Provide a minimum of four (4) Class B Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) for all floors exceeding 4,830 square meters (52,000 square feet) in gross area. The floor SLCs shall be isolated from the SLC risers and network. The system must be designed and installed so that a single wire to wire short or any other single Style 4 impairment on an SLC does not affect more than one half of the area of the floor or 1,207 square meters (13,000 square feet) whichever is less.

E. All circuits necessary for the operation of the notification appliances shall be protected by a 2 hour fire rated enclosure or with 2 hour fire rated conductors until they enter the evacuation signaling zone that they serve in accordance with this section.

F. A minimum of two (2) distinct fire alarm audible notification appliance circuits and a minimum of two (2) distinct visible notification appliance circuits shall be provided on each floor. No single NAC shall serve more than a 1,207 square meter (13,000 square feet) area. The system must be designed and installed so that a single wire to wire short or any other single Style Y impairment on an audible or visible NAC does not affect more than one half of the area of the floor or 13,000 square feet (1,207 square meters) whichever is less

G. The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm-initiating device.

The system shall remain in the alarm mode until all initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal.

H. The system shall provide the following functions and operating features:

1. Provide Style B (Class B) initiating device circuits.

2. Provide, as a minimum, Style 4 (Class B) signaling line circuits for each floor.

3. Provide Style 7 (Class A) signaling line circuits for the network for the interconnecting riser loop.

4. Provide Style Y (Class B) notification appliance circuits.




5. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC) supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and placement of system modules within the control panel.

6. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or

open condition, or ground fault that prevents the required operation of the system. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, or low battery voltage. Provide a trouble alarm silence feature that will silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke detector in the process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition.

7. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch which, when activated, will

cause the audible notification appliances to cease operating, but not affect the liquid crystal display or the automatic notification of a UL listed central station service. The activation of the silencing switch shall cause the strobe lights to cease operation. This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm.

8. Provide thirty (30) second alarm verification or application specific programming

for area smoke detectors.

9. Provide individual switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits, air handler shutdown, smoke control operation, door release, door unlocking, and elevator recall features. Operation of these switches shall indicate this action as a trouble signal on the FACP display and printer output. Provide only manufacturer approved switches listed as part of the fire alarm control panel.

10. All alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to a

UL listed central station. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, programming, software, etc., to accomplish these functions and actually transmit these signals. Dedicated telephone line installation and alarm monitoring account creation/transfer shall be coordinated with the Property or Project Manager. Telephone lines in new buildings shall be installed by the Contractor and connected to the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter by the Contractor. Telephone lines in existing buildings shall be provided to the location of the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter by the Property Manager and connected to the Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter by the Contractor.

11. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions. 12. The system shall be capable of being programmed in the field. All programmed

information shall be stored in non-volatile memory. All programming shall be accomplished in two ways: either by direct entry to the fire alarm control panel keyboard; or, by offline programming in a laptop or personal computer with the




program updates being downloaded from the computer to the fire alarm control panel.

13. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising, and/or monitoring both

addressable and non-addressable alarm and supervisory devices.

14. There shall be no limit, other than the manufacturer’s limitation under the control panel’s listing, as to the number of addressable devices that may be in alarm simultaneously.

15. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another

emergency control device or system, such as an HVAC system or elevator system, the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within .9 meters (3 feet) of the device or system being controlled. The use of non fire alarm equipment or systems to shut down equipment is not permitted.

16. Where speakers are installed in a SCIF, one of the following methods shall be

used to meet fire and security requirements:

a. Self Amplified Speakers or Speaker/Strobes b. Remote Dedicated Amplification c. Remote Signal Modules d. Fiber Optic Transceiver Units

17. An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

a. Transmission of an alarm signal to a UL listed Central Station. The

DACT shall be connected to the loop-start telephone lines.

b. Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP).

c. Continuous automatic actuation of alarm notification appliances

throughout the building, or on selected floors, with the exception of those located in stairs or in elevator cabs. In areas where occupants will either relocate or evacuate, the system shall automatically activate a three pulse temporal whoop pattern tone for three (3) cycles followed by the automatic voice messages which shall be repeated until the control panel is reset or the audible silence switch is activated at the FACP (i.e. three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone - three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone - three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone - voice message; three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone - three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone - three-pulse temporal whoop pattern tone – voice message; etc.). In the event of an elevator recall by the elevator lobby or machine room smoke detectors, a voice message shall be transmitted to the affected elevator cabs. The message shall be as follows: "May I have your




attention please. May I have your attention please. Please exit the elevator when it stops and await further instructions."

1) A partial evacuation / relocation scenario shall be utilized and

the voice messages shall be distributed as follows:

(a) The “Fire Zone” message shall be broadcast through speakers on the floor of alarm origin, the floor immediately above the floor of origin, and the floor immediately below the floor of origin. In addition, the visual alarm indicating circuit(s) shall be activated on all floors receiving the “Fire Zone” message. A First Floor alarm shall transmit a “Fire Zone” message to all below grade floors. Any “basement level” alarm shall transmit a “Fire Zone” message to all below grade floors in addition to the First Floor.

(b) The “Fire Zone Message” shall be as follows:

(i) For alarms originating from the 6th Floor or

above, the message shall be:

“May I have your attention, please! May I have your attention, please! A fire has been reported which may affect your floor. Please walk to the nearest exit, walk down 4 floors, re-enter the building, walk onto the floor, and await further instructions. Please do not use the elevators.”

(ii) For alarms originating from the 5th Floor or

below, the message shall be broadcast on all floors from the 6th floor and below and state:

“May I have your attention, please! May I have your attention, please! A fire has been reported which may affect your floor. Please walk to the nearest exit and leave the building. Please do not use the elevators.”

(c) The “Safe Area Zone” message shall simultaneously be

broadcast to all other building floors. However, the visual alarm indicating circuits shall not be activated on these floors. The “Safe Area Zone” message shall activate for two complete rounds and silence automatically. After five minutes, the “Safe Area Zone” message shall automatically start and activate for two complete rounds and silence again. This sequence shall be repeated until the fire alarm system is reset or the audible silence switch is activated on the FACP. In the




event a subsequent fire alarm is received at the fire alarm control panel by a floor that was previously receiving a “Safe Area Zone” message, this floor, the floor above and the floor below shall automatically revert to perform the actions for a “Fire Zone” message.

(d) The “Safe Area Zone” message shall be as follows:

“May I have your attention, please! May I have your attention, please! A fire has been reported in another area of the building. You are in a safe area. Please stay in your work area and await further instructions. Please do not use the elevators.”

d. Recording of the event via the system printer.

e. Activating the audible directional egress devices. f. Releasing the power to door locks in approved delayed egress hardware

or approved access control systems as defined by NFPA 101, Life Safety Code and as approved by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer.

g. Operating an approved pager interface.

18. The following operations shall occur upon activation of the respective initiating

device:

a. Operation of a smoke detector in an elevator lobby, or elevator machine room shall recall the elevators in addition to initiating the functions in the aforementioned section. Provide primary and alternate floor recall as required by NFPA 72. Operation of a smoke detector within an elevator machine room shall also flash the fire service (firefighter’s hat) lamp inside the affected elevator cars.

b. Operation of a sprinkler waterflow detector in an elevator machinery

room shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to immediately shut down power to the elevators. Waterflow devices shall not be permitted to have a time delay feature to disconnect power to the elevator.

c. Operation of a heat detector located within elevator machine rooms shall

operate shunt trip circuit breakers for elevators. Waterflow devices shall be permitted to have a time delay feature to disconnect power to the elevator as a back-up to the heat detector.

d. Operation of the smoke control system shall occur upon operation of the

dedicated initiating devices.




e. Operation of a smoke detector installed in accordance with NFPA 72 and located adjacent to a door that is normally held open by electromagnetic devices shall release the associated door(s).

f. Operation of a smoke detector dedicated to stair pressurization shall

initiate stair pressurization.

19. A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions:

a. Transmission of a supervisory signal to a UL listed Central Station

b. Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel (FACP)

c. Recording of the event via the system printer

20. The following operations shall occur upon activation of the respective initiating device:

a. Operation of a duct smoke detector shall shut down the air handler it

serves and provide a supervisory signal to the fire alarm control panel.

21. A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions:

a. Transmission of a trouble signal to a UL listed Central Station.

b. Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP.

c. Recording of the event via the system printer.

22. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be ten (10) seconds.

23. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and

its indication at the FACP shall not exceed two hundred (200) seconds. 1.5 SYSTEM MONITORING

A. Valves: Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system, including automatic sprinkler control valves, standpipe control valves, sprinkler service entrance valve, valves at fire pumps, and valves at backflow preventers, whether supplied under this contract or existing, shall be monitored to ensure its proper position. Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address.

B. Independent Systems: Each existing independent smoke detection sub-system and fire

extinguishing system shall be monitored for the presence of alarm, trouble, and supervisory conditions. Each monitored condition shall be provided with a separate




address. This includes supervision of the elevator recall and shunt trip circuits for voltage, where applicable.

1.6 OVER-VOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION

A. Circuit Surge Protection: For systems having initiating, notification, signaling and communication circuits located outdoors, all communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on all circuits. All cables and conductors, which serve as communication links, shall also be provided with surge protection. Surge protection shall meet the requirements of Article 760 of the NEC and be UL listed for this purpose.

B. Over-voltage and surge protection equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit six (6) complete sets of submittals. Partial submittals will not be accepted and will be returned without review. Catalog data shall specifically show manufacturer's name, model, voltage, candela ratings of strobes, and catalog numbers for all equipment and components. Before any work is commenced, the GSA Fire Protection Engineer must approve the submittal. Manufacturer's data shall be annotated and provided for the following:

1 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) (Including Printer, Covers, Console Rack,

Video Display Unit, etc.) 2. Tone Generators 3. Digitized Voice Generators 4. Amplifiers 5. Storage Batteries 6. Battery Charger 7. Cabinets 8. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter 9. Manual Pull Stations 10. Addressable Interface Devices 11. Terminal Cabinets/Assemblies 12. Addressable Relays 13. Touch Screen Annunciator Panel 14. Speaker Units 15. Combination Speaker/Strobe Units 16. Visual Notification Appliance Strobes 17. Smoke Detectors 18. All Wiring Types and Sizes 19. Conduit and Raceway 20. Power Conditioner 21. Addressable Device Labels 22. Waterflow Switches 23. Tamper Switches 24. Remote Fire Alarm Control Units 25. Electromagnetic Door Holders




26. Duct Detectors and Remote LED indicators 27. Audible directional egress devices 28. Re-Entrant Horn Loudspeakers 29. Pager interfaces 30. Fire fighter’s Smoke Control Panel including Graphic Display

B. Shop Drawings: Submit full size shop drawings not smaller than 1:100 (1/8) accompanied by an electronic version in AutoCAD. As a minimum, the shop drawing submittal shall include the following:

1. Point-to-point-wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals

used for all electrical field connections in the system, including all interconnections between the equipment or systems that are supervised or controlled by the system. Diagrams shall show all connections from field devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units, initiating circuits, switches, relays and terminals.

2. Drawings showing device locations, terminal cabinet locations, and all circuit

layouts for all floors. All wiring sizes, types, and number in each conduit. Sizes and types of all conduit. All addressable devices shall have their digital addresses indicated on the shop drawing at the appropriate location. All visual notification appliances shall have their candela ratings indicated. All audible notification appliances shall have their wattage taps indicated.

3. Detailed drawings showing the layout of the Fire Alarm Control Panel including

power supply, battery location, CPU, displays, modules, circuit boards, tone generators, amplifiers, NAC output devices including synchronization modules, terminal wiring scheme, add on terminals and any other functional component of the Fire Alarm Control Panel. All internal wiring details of the panel, including jumper positions must be shown.

4. Complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of all devices and their

connections to the control equipment. Provide floor plans showing the location of all devices and equipment.

C. Calculations

1. Battery Calculations

a. Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power requirements including voice system. Ampere-hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations.

b. Calculate standby battery requirements for new batteries per

manufacturer’s installation requirements including all factors for aging, etc.

c. Provide batteries with capacity rated at 150% of above calculated value.

2. Notification Circuit Calculations




a. Provide calculations on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25%

spare power capacity for visual notification appliances, 25% spare capacity for audible notification appliances, and 25% spare capacity for notification device circuits. Note that this is spare power capacity and not spare programming capacity.

b. Provide calculations showing that no individual notification circuit is

loaded beyond 80% of its full load capacity. Provide calculations that show that the total load for each remote power supply or FACP power supply is 80% or less of its full load capacity.

3. Voice Evacuation Speaker Calculations

a. Provide calculations to indicate that the system has sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive all fire alarm speakers at their required sound output plus 25%spare capacity.

b. Provide calculations such that the total loss for each individual circuit is

no more than one (1) dBA with all devices assumed at the end of the circuit.

c. Provide calculations that show that no individual speaker circuit is

loaded beyond 80% of its capacity. A speaker circuit’s capacity is defined as no more than one (1) dBA loss or the wattage limitation of the speaker notification module, whichever is less.

d. Provide calculations that show that the total load for each amplifier is

80% or less of its full load capacity.

4. Voltage Drop Calculations

a. Provide voltage drop calculations by the use of either a lumped load calculation (all devices assumed at the end of the circuit) or by the distributive load calculation method whereby voltage drops are calculated for each device. If the distributive method is chosen then use the UL max current rating of the device at its lowest voltage rating. If the lumped load method is chosen then use the UL average RMS current rating of the device at 24 volts.

b. Provide calculations such that with a supply voltage of 24.0 volts, the last

device shall have no less than 21.6 volts measured across its terminals.

D. System Operation Matrix: The drawings shall show the sequence of fire alarm operations by providing an input/output matrix. The matrix shall distinguish between alarm, supervisory and trouble signals and incorporate the following information:

1. System Inputs




a. Manual fire alarm pull stations b. Sprinkler waterflow switch c. Tamper switch d. Smoke detector e. Elevator lobby smoke detectors for each elevator lobby f. Duct smoke detectors g. Area smoke detectors

2. System Outputs

a. Audible and visual notification appliances and associated signals for entire building and where required outputs for evacuation vs. relocation

b. Transmit “Fire Alarm” signal to UL Listed Central Station c. Transmit “Supervisory” signal to UL listed Central Station d. Transmit “Trouble” signal to UL listed Central Station e. Recall of associated elevators to primary floor f. Recall of associated elevators to alternate floor g. Light elevator car fire service light h. Flash elevator car fire service light i. Shut down respective air handling units j. Print out event on fire alarm system printer k. Display event on fire alarm annunciator panel l. Display specific device information and state on FACP m. Activate audible directional egress devices

1.8 DOCUMENT SECURITY

A. Labeling of information. All Sensitive But Unclassified (SBU) building information, either in electronic or paper formats shall have imprinted on each page of the information:

PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Do not remove this notice

Properly destroy documents when no longer needed

B. The following paragraph will be included on the cover page of the information (such as the cover page on the set of construction drawings and on the cover page of the specifications) and on the label of all magnetic media:

PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS, PLANS, OR SPECIFICATIONS TO UNAUTHORIZED USERS IS PROHIBITED

Do not remove this notice Properly destroy documents when no longer needed

C. The previous two statements shall be prominently labeled in bold type in a size

appropriate for the document. On a set of construction drawings, for example, the statements should be in a minimum of 14-point bold type.




1.9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manual Pull Stations

1. Locate at all exterior exit doors, within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of the door. 2. Locate at all stairwell entrance doors, within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of the door.

B. Notification Appliances - Speakers

1. Locate in each elevator car. Each bank of elevators shall be on its own separate speaker circuit (zone).

2. Locate in all restrooms. 3. Locate in all stairwells, not more than four (4) floors apart. Stairwells shall have

their own speaker circuit (zone). 4. Locate throughout the building to provide a minimum sound level of 70 dBA

throughout the office spaces, courtrooms, general building areas and corridors measured 1.5 meters (5 feet) above the floor

5. Sound levels in other areas shall be at least 15 dBA above the average sounder level or five (5) dbA above any noise source lasting sixty (60) seconds or longer.

6. Locate speakers at a maximum coverage of 83.6 square meters (900 square feet.) per speaker.

7. Locate speakers so that all rooms within the building are not more than one (1) doorway from a speaker.

C. Notification Appliances - Strobes

1. Locate in all public areas of the building, including lobbies, reception areas, copy rooms, break rooms and waiting rooms.

2. Locate in all common areas of the building, including corridors, open office areas, building core spaces and conference rooms.

3. Locate in all rest rooms. 4. Locate in all high noise areas (ambient noise level exceeds 90 dBA). 5. DO NOT locate in stairwells or elevator cars.

D. Notification Appliances – Re-entrant Horn Loudspeakers

1. Locate in any high noise areas (ambient noise level exceeds 90 dBA). E. Spot Type Smoke Detectors

1. Locate in all elevator lobbies. 2. Locate in all elevator machine rooms 3. Locate outside, and within 10 feet of, all stairwell doors which serve stairwells

with a pressurization system. 4. Locate in the electrical switchgear room. 5. Locate in the main telephone equipment (PBX) room. 6. Locate at all doors with electromagnetic door holders.




7. DO NOT locate detectors in the following: mechanical equipment rooms, electrical and telephone closets (except with FACPs), emergency generator room, transformer vaults, UPS and battery rooms.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors

1. Locate per NFPA 72, NFPA 90A and manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Locate as required for the control of fire/smoke dampers. 3. Locate as required for fan shutdown in accordance with NFPA 90A.

G. Heat Detectors

1. Locate in elevator machine rooms within 0.6 meters (2 feet) horizontally of every sprinkler. Provide heat detector at the same level or higher than the sprinkler.

H. Valve Supervisory Switches

1. Locate on all fire pump control valves. 2. Locate on all fire sprinkler system floor control valves. 3. Locate on all water supply and water tank valves. 4. Locate on all standpipe control valves.

I. Water Flow Switches

1. Locate on sprinkler system supply for each floor. 2. Locate at the base of each standpipe riser. 3. Locate on the building fire protection water supply line.

J. Electromagnetic Door Holders

1. Locate on all fire doors required by the project to be normally open. K. Firefighter Telephone Jacks

1. Locate in each elevator lobby, at every floor. (Include in the elevator bank zone). 2. Locate in all stairwells, at each floor landing (one zone per stairwell). 3. Locate in each elevator car (one (1) zone per elevator bank).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A. Provide surface mounted, double action, addressable manual stations, which are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration. Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor. Stations that require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted. Stations shall be finished in red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color. The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station.




2.2 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE

A The addressable monitor module shall provide an addressable input interface to the FACP for monitoring normally-open or normally-closed contact devices such as waterflow switches, tamper switches, fire pump monitoring, kitchen hood fire suppression systems, relays for output function actuation, etc. Addressable monitor module shall have an integral LED that indicates an easily detectable change of state at the device. A status indication for the device shall be visible and plainly identifiable for normal condition, trouble condition, and alarm condition. This visible indication shall be detectable with the naked eye, and shall not require any tools or devices to be seen or to be made visible.

2.3 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

A. The addressable control module shall provide interfacing with equipment for control. The addressable control module may be configured as an addressable relay module for controlling external devices and equipment such as fans, dampers, secure doors, ambient noise sources, etc.

2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Fire Alarm Speakers:

1. Provide fire alarm speakers conforming to UL 1480 having a minimum of four (4) tap settings and separate terminations for each "in" and "out" connection. At a minimum, tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, ½, 1 and 2 watts. Speakers shall be initially set at the 1/2 watt tap setting; however, setting shall be adjusted to meet sound pressure requirements. Speakers shall have an output rating of 84 dBA at three (3) meters (9.9 feet) as determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not suitable. All speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 100 mm (4 inch) square electrical boxes. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location, they may be combined into a single wall or wall/ceiling mounted unit.

2. To ensure audible signals are clearly heard, the sound level shall be at least 70

dBA throughout the office spaces, courtrooms, general building areas and corridors measured 1.5 meters (5 feet) above the floor. The sound level in other areas shall be at least 15 (fifteen) dBA above the average sound level or five (5) dBA above any noise source lasting 60 seconds or longer. Sound level measurements shall be taken with room doors closed. Quantities of fire alarm speakers shown on the contract drawings are for cost estimating purposes only. Additional speakers shall be provided at no additional expense to the government if the sound levels noted above are not achieved during the final acceptance testing.

B. Visual Notification Appliances

1. Provide visual alarm appliances (strobes) that operate on a supervised twenty-

four (24) volt D.C. circuit. The strobe lens shall comply with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act. All strobes shall incorporate




circuitry for synchronized strobe flash. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of four field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 with a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum across the listed voltage range. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. The strobe shall have a Xenon flash tube. The strobe shall have a red cover plate.

2. Provide synchronization modules on strobe light circuits, and/or synchronized

power supplies, as necessary, to ensure strobe lights are synchronized in any vertical or horizontal line of sight, in accordance with NFPA 72.

C. Multi-Candela Combination Speaker/Strobe Appliances

1. Provide multi-candela combination speaker/strobe appliances listed under UL Standard 1971 and UL Standard 1480. All strobes shall incorporate circuitry for synchronized strobe flash. The strobe intensity shall have a minimum of four field selectable settings and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 with a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum across the listed voltage range. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. The strobe shall incorporate a Xenon flash tube. The appliance shall also be designed so that the visual signal shall be silenced when silencing the audible signal. Provide fire alarm speakers conforming to UL 1480 having a minimum of four (4) tap settings and separate terminations for each "in" and "out" connection. At a minimum, tap settings shall include taps of 1/4, ½, 1 and 2 watts. All speakers shall be initially set at the 1/2 watt tap setting; however, this setting shall be adjusted to meet sound pressure requirements. Speakers shall have an output rating as determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not suitable. The strobe shall have a red cover plate.

2 To ensure audible signals are clearly heard, the sound level shall be at least 70

dBA throughout the office spaces, courtrooms, general building areas, and corridors measured 1.5 meters (5 feet) above the floor. The sound level in other areas shall be at least fifteen (15) dBA above the average sound level or five (5) dBA above any noise source lasting sixty (60) seconds or longer. Sound level measurements shall be taken with room doors closed. Quantities of fire alarm speaker/strobes shown on the contract drawings are for cost estimating purposes only. Additional speaker/strobes shall be provided at no additional expense to the government if the sound levels noted above are not achieved during the final acceptance testing

3. Provide synchronization modules on strobe light circuits, and/or synchronized

power supplies, as necessary, to ensure strobe lights are synchronized in any vertical or horizontal line of sight, in accordance with NFPA 72.

D. Re-entrant Horn Loudspeaker Appliances

1. Provide surface mounted horn loudspeakers suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit in high noise areas. Supervised horn loudspeakers shall be




double re-entrant type with a fifteen (15) watt RMS audio power rated compression driver producing a UL rated 102 dbA measured at fifteen (15) watts at three (3) meters (10 feet). The horn loudspeaker shall be weather resistant and constructed of heavy gauge, treated aluminum. The horn loudspeaker shall be able to operate within any ambient temperature environment ranging from 66 degrees C (150°F) to -35 degrees C (-30°F). Output from supervised horn loudspeakers shall be synchronized with other speakers.

2. The horn loudspeaker assembly shall be furnished with a mounting bracket that

allows adjustment on either a vertical or horizontal plane with a single locking pin and include provisions for mounting, banding or strapping. Wiring terminals shall be fully enclosed and a vandal-resistant adapter cover shall provide connection protection for cable or conduit.

E. Connections:

1. Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance. Terminals shall be

designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification.

F. Remote Dedicated Amplification (RDA)

1. lnstall the Remote Dedicated Amplifier inside the secure area. The audio to the amplifier shall be fed from an existing speaker circuit where possible. The amplifier shall be sized to assume the entire load of the speakers in the secure area plus an additional 25% spare for future expansion.

2. The amplifiers must be intelligent so that they reside on the existing addressable

loop. The RDA shall have the capability to be programmed to operate independently. The amplifiers must be housed in a separate enclosure and must be provided with a back-up amplifier and standby batteries. The loss of the speaker (audio) circuit serving the RDA amplifier shall cause a “trouble” condition on the RDA and the building FACP. If an “alarm” occurs while the speaker (audio) circuit is in “trouble” a back-up “alarm” tone shall be generated to secure area served.

G. Remote Control Module (RCM)

1. Provide an addressable Control Module inside the secure area that will use an

existing speaker circuit as the audio input to the module. The module shall physically isolate the secure area speakers from the existing speaker circuits when the voice fire alarm system is not in alarm. The module must provide supervision of the secure area speakers and report any abnormal conditions to the fire alarm control unit via the SLC. When an Alarm condition or voice paging event occurs, the control module shall connect the speaker/audio circuit secure area speakers and an LED shall light on the remote control module (indicating that the secure speaker circuit has been activated). The control module shall be




rated and designed to accommodate the load of the secure area speakers plus 25% specified spare capacity.

2. Each intelligent single input control module shall provide one (1) supervised

Class B speaker circuit. The single input control module shall support the following operations: Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 VDC @ 2Amps; or 25 Volt audio (50 watts) or 70 volt audio (35 watts).

3. No more than two (2) RCM’s may be installed on any one (1) audio (speaker

circuit). No more than sixteen (16) speakers shall be permitted on each RCM circuit.

H. Fiber Optic Transceiver Units

1. Transmitter Panel: Install the fiber optic transmitter unit outside of the secure area. Connect this panel to the building fire alarm control panel. This panel shall operate on 120 VAC, 60hz. A speaker /audio input is required (25 vrms or 70 vrms). A fire alarm strobe circuit input is required. The transmitter panel shall have at least two (2) normally open dry contacts to activate building FACP monitor modules, as well as a normally closed dry contact. This panel monitors fire alarm signals from the receiver panel, and converts the audio messages from 25 VRMS and 70 VRMS to a supervised fiber optic audio signal.

2. Receiver Panel: Install the fiber optic receiver unit inside the secure area. The

receiver unit shall be connected to the transmitter unit by common dual mode fiber optic cable. This panel acts as a stand alone four initiating zone (class B) IDCs, with 4 output NACs. Self amplified speakers as well as standard fire alarm speakers can be used. One (1) of the NACs can power the self-amplified speakers.

I. DIODE Blocking

1. The use of diode blocking in speaker circuit privacy applications, where two (2)

diodes are connected in parallel in the speaker line, is not an acceptable security application.

2.5 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Smoke Detectors: Provide analog addressable smoke detectors as follows:

1. Provide UL listed photoelectric type analog addressable smoke detectors.

2. Provide self-restoring type detectors that do not require any readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Detectors shall be UL listed with the fire alarm control panel.

3. All components shall be rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no

effect on the detector's operation. The detection chamber shall have a fine mesh




metallic screen that prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber.

4. Provide twist lock bases for the detectors. The detectors shall maintain contact

with their bases without the use of springs. Provide companion-mounting base with fixed wiring terminals. Terminate field wiring on the fixed terminals. The detector shall have a visual indicator to show actuation.

5. Detectors shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

6. The detector address shall identify the particular unit, its location within the

system, and its sensitivity setting. Detectors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system.

7. Provide detectors that are rated for the air velocity expected.

B. Duct Smoke Detectors: Provide smoke detectors as specified above.

1. Provide detectors with approved duct housing, mounted to the exterior of the

duct, and with perforated sampling tubes extending across the width of the duct in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Provide detectors that are rated for the air velocity expected.

3. Where the installed location of a duct detector is concealed or not readily visible,

provide a remote LED to indicate the operation and location of the detector.

2.6 RATE COMPENSATED HEAT DETECTORS

A. General: Provide rate compensated heat detectors as follows:

1. Provide detectors designed for detection of fire by rate compensation principal. Provide detectors designed for surface outlet box mounting and supported independently of wiring connections. Detectors shall be hermetically sealed and of the automatically resetting type, which will operate when, ambient air temperature reaches detector setting regardless of rate of temperature rise. Detector operation shall not be subject to thermal lag.

2. Where provided in elevator machine rooms for shunt trip function, provide

detectors that have both a lower temperature rating and a higher sensitivity (often characterized by a lower response time index (RTI)) as compared to the sprinklers located in the elevator machine rooms. A lower RTI is intended to provide detector response prior to sprinkler response.

3. Heat detectors shall be rated at 135 degrees F (57 degrees C). Exception: in non-

conditioned elevator machine rooms where ambient conditions may exceed 100




degrees F (38 degrees C), heat detectors shall be rated at 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).

2.7 TAMPER SWITCHES

A. General: Provide tamper switches to replace each existing tamper switch or as required for new systems for fire protection system control valves where indicated on the drawings. Tamper switches shall be UL listed for fire protection service. Each device shall have at least two sets of contacts so that two different systems may monitor the switch at any given time during renovations and replacements. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. Operation of the switch shall cause a supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FACP upon not more than two (2) complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of ten percent, whichever is less. Tamper switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

2.8 WATERFLOW DETECTORS

A. General: Provide a pressure switch type waterflow detector to replace each existing waterflow detector or as required for new systems. Each device shall have at least two (2) sets of contacts so that two different systems may monitor the switch at any given time during renovations and replacements. The device shall contain double pole, double throw contacts. Provide a pneumatic or electronic time delay, field adjustable from zero (0) to ninety (90) seconds. The time delay shall be set initially to thirty (30) seconds for zone/floor waterflow detectors and forty-five (45) seconds for riser or main waterflow detectors. The device shall be a UL listed for fire protection service and rated for the particular pressure and location at which it is installed. Waterflow detectors shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor.

2.9 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. General: Where indicated on the drawings, provide magnetic fire door hold open devices. The electromagnetic holding devices shall be designed to operate on 120 VAC. The initiation of any fire alarm shall cause the release of the electromagnetic door holding device permitting the door to be closed by the door closer. The device shall be UL listed based on UL 228 tests.

2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC) POWER SUPPLY PANELS:

A. Provide complete NAC power supply panels fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure

as specified herein. All operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the control units shall be performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required at a location to provide the required NAC functions, the units and their enclosures shall match exactly. Each NAC power supply panel shall provide power, supervision, control and logic for its portion of the entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components, internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each NAC power supply panel shall be suitable for operation on a 120-volt, 60 hertz,




emergency building power supply. Provide each unit with supervisory functions for power failure and circuit operation.

B. Cabinet: An engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate shall identify the enclosure.

Lettering on the nameplate shall say Fire Alarm NAC Panel and shall not be less than 25 mm (1 inch) high. The cabinet shall be provided in sturdy steel housing, complete with backbox, hinged steel door with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.

C. Control Circuits: Provide power and control circuits to perform all functions of the NAC

power supply panel. Connect all circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of nominal voltage. Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25% spare capacity for each circuit.

D. The NAC power supply panels shall have individual addressable control modules that

activate the NAC circuits upon command from the FACP or RFACU.

E. The NAC power supply panels shall have individual addressable monitor modules that monitor the panel for trouble conditions and report them through unique digital address to the FACP directly or via a RFACU.

2.11 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS: A. General: Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators, digitalized voice drives and all

other hardware necessary for a complete, operational voice/alarm signaling service conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote fire alarm control unit, or in the fire alarm control panel. The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs. The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages and the appropriate zone selector switches have been activated. Amplifiers shall be provided for a four (4)-channel system as a minimum

B. Inputs: Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator,

digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance, balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier.

C. Tone Generator: The tone generator shall produce a three-pulse temporal tone and be

constantly repeated until interrupted by the digitalized voice message, the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified. .

D. Protection Circuits: Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition

which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier, illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the control panel, appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions as specified. This requires at least one (1) backup amplifier per system.




2.12 ANNUNCIATOR

A. Remote Control Annunciator Panel 1. Provide a remote control annunciator. The remote control annunciator panel

shall communicate with the fire alarm control panel and shall include a minimum 80-character, backlit, LCD display that is identical to the integral fire alarm control panel LCD display. The remote control annunciator shall contain control function switches as specified below that operate in the identical manner as the main FACP. The requirements of the remote control annunciator shall be such that:

a. The annunciator requires no more than four wires on the communication

loop (two for communication, two for supervision) and two additional wires for power.

b. In addition to the LCD English language display; the annunciator also

includes a Power LED, Alarm LED, Trouble LED and Supervisory LED. c. LCD display annunciators are identical to the main control panel LCD

display and shall not require special programming. d. A local piezo sounder are included on the remote control annunciator. e. Switches for Acknowledge, Lamp Test, Silence, and Reset are included

on the annunciator. Other functions as specified for this project shall be programmed into function switches on the annunciator in an identical manner to those programmed into the main FACP. There shall be enough function switches on the remote control annunciator to perform the same functions as the main FACP.

f. Switches in remote control annunciators are protected from unauthorized

usage by a locked cabinet door or by a key switch. (Door or switch to be keyed alike to the main FACP).

B. Touch Screen Annunciator

1. Provide a touch screen annunciator. The touch screen annunciator shall

communicate with the fire alarm control panel and shall include color graphics that are identical to those used on the FACP video display unit. The touch screen annunciator shall contain control functions software that operates in the identical manner as the main FACP. The requirements of the touch screen annunciator shall be such that:

a. The annunciator requires no more than four wires on the communication

loop (two for communication, two for supervision) and two additional wires for power.




b. The touch screen annunciator has CAD drawings of each level of the building and all fire alarm initiating devices shall be correctly located on those drawings.

c. Each initiating device indicates green for normal operation, yellow for

trouble or off normal, and red for alarm on the drawing display when such a device is being displayed.

d. Drawing displays allow for zoom out to full floor view or zoom in to

individual device location. e. There is a toggle button on screen for all drawing levels that allow

instant migration to the floor above or the floor below the floor currently being displayed on screen.

f. The touch screen annunciator is powered from the same sources as the

FACP and shall have emergency power provided. g. Access to control functions for this annunciator is physically secured

against access from unauthorized persons. Any locks used shall be keyed alike with the FACP and all other fire alarm panels in the building.

h. The touch screen unit displays English language text as the first screen

after an initiating device is activated. Alarm messages shall be distinctly different than all other messages on the system.

i. There is on screen button which takes a person from the English

language text message directly to the drawing which indicates the exact location of the alarm device activated. Likewise there shall be an on screen toggle which takes a person from a drawing back to the text message(s).

j. The video display is 425 mm (17 inches) diagonally or larger. Where

necessary consider flat screen technology to avoid large protrusions or penetration of fire rated fire partitions.

k. The video display always displays date and local time.

2.13 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. General: Provide a system printer to record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Printout shall be by circuit, device, and function as provided in the FACP.

1. The printer shall generate a low paper signal before running out of paper. 2. Printer shall operate on a 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply, and shall be fed from

an emergency generator supplied distribution panel, if one is available.




2.14 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTERS

A. The Contractor shall provide and install a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter, wiring, and all other devices and software necessary to automatically transmit fire alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals over leased telephone lines to a UL listed Central Station Service.

B. The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitters shall be addressable and be mounted

inside the FACP.

C. The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for sending signals to the DHS-FPS Regional Emergency Management Control Center shall comply with the following requirements:

All installations and upgrades of alarm system transmitters must meet national standards using control panels that are Remote Access Programmable and are fully compatible with one (1) of the four (4) following manufacturer's digital alarm receivers:

1. Radionics - Model Numbers 7412G or 9412G 2. Honeywell (Ademco) Vista 128 or 250 3. CADDx NX8E 4. Digital Monitoring Products - XR100 or XR500

D. Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay all fees for monitoring the new fire alarm

system prior to acceptance of the system by the Government. The Contractor, with the assistance of the Property Manager, shall make all arrangements to set up accounts for transmitting fire alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals over leased telephone lines to a UL listed Central Station Service. It is the intent of this paragraph to assure the Contractor has installed, made operational, and tested all external fire alarm connections from the building to a U.L. listed Central Station Service prior to final acceptance testing.

E. The installation shall be certificated and conspicuously marked with a placard in

accordance with NFPA 72. The size of the placard shall be at least 130 square cm (20 square inches) & it shall be located on or within .9 meters (36 inches) of the fire alarm control panel.

2.15 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. Batteries: Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP, all Remote Fire Alarm Control Units and Notification Appliance Circuit power supply panels. The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid-state battery charger. Supervise the placement and condition of the batteries by the fire alarm system. Identify the battery manufactured date (month and year) in a durable fashion (e.g., etching, durable signage).

G. Capacity: Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate all signaling line

circuits, initiating device circuits, and notification appliance circuits in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of




operation on battery power, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system in alarm mode for a period of fifteen (15) minutes. Battery capacity calculations shall be based on equipment current draw at a minimum operating voltage of 24 VDC. Provide batteries sized at 150% of fire alarm manufacturer’s calculations.

H. Battery Charger: Provide a solid state, fully automatic, variable charging rate battery

charger. The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge. In the event the batteries are fully discharged the charger shall recharge them back to 95% of full charge within 48 hours. Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided. Provide a separate ammeter for recording rate of charge and a separate voltmeter to indicate the state of the battery charge or provide a system that displays this information as an integral part of the control panel. Supervise the placement and condition of the batteries by the fire alarm system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING

A. Wiring Within Cabinets, Enclosures, Boxes, and Junction Boxes: Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box, enclosure or cabinet. All conductors that are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks, which are securely mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited.

B. Alarm Wiring: Signaling line circuits, speaker circuits, and initiating device circuits shall

be copper, No. 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Visual notification appliance circuits shall be copper No. 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum. Use larger wire sizes when recommended by the manufacturer, based on actual system configurations. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of nominal voltage. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be No. 12 AWG solid copper having insulation rated for 600 volts. The use of flexible metal conduit not exceeding a 1.8 meter (6-foot) length shall be permitted for initiating device circuits. Run conduit concealed in finished areas unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Conduit may be exposed in unfinished mechanical/electrical rooms, basement, mezzanine, and penthouse levels. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where required by the manufacturer. T-taps are permitted in Style 4 circuits with interconnections occurring on terminal strips. Circuits to fan shutdown systems, elevator recall systems, elevator shunt trip systems, smoke control systems, and egress door systems shall terminate in terminal cabinets within 0.9 meters (3 feet) of the controllers for those systems. The completion of those circuits from the terminal cabinets to the appropriate system shall be provided under this section.




C. Conductor Terminations: No specific color coding is required for any circuit; however,

labeling of any circuit at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets, FACP, remote fire alarm control units and at field devices shall be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or cable shall have a heat shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation. Each terminal cabinet, FACP and remote fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing that indicates each conductor, its label, circuit and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using 12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet, panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals.

3.2 FIRESTOPPING & FIREPROOFING

A. General: Firestop all holes for conduit, piping, or other penetrations which pass through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated doors, vertical service shafts, or any fire-rated assemblies in accordance with specification section Firestopping. Existing holes through which new conduit for this project passes shall be totally firestopped in a manner that restores the fire protection rating of the penetrated wall, floor, ceiling or other structure.

B. Where structural fire proofing is disturbed, damaged, or destroyed as a result of the fire

alarm installation, the contractor shall be responsible for restoring the fire proofing to the required fire resistance rating in an approved manner. This restoration shall be done in accordance with the UL listing or FM approval of the fireproofing materials, requirements of the building, fire, and life safety codes in effect for the project, and in accordance with specification section Firestopping.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM DEVICES

A. Manual Pull Stations: Locate manual pull stations where shown on the drawings. Mount stations so that their operating handles are 1.4 meters (4.5 feet) above the finished floor in areas that allow parallel wheelchair access, and no more than 1.2 meters (4 feet) above the finished floor in areas that allow only perpendicular wheelchair access.

B. Notification Appliances: Locate notification appliance devices where shown on the

drawings. Mount assemblies as follows:

1. Fire Alarm Speakers shall be surface mounted and meet the requirements of NFPA 72.

2. Multi-Candela Combination Speaker/Strobe Appliances shall be surface mounted

and meet the requirements of NFPA 72.

3. Visible Strobe Appliances shall be wall mounted and meet the requirements of NFPA 72.

C. Smoke Detectors: Locate detectors as shown on the drawings on a 100 mm (4 inch)

mounting box. Detectors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 100 mm (4 inch) from a sidewall to the near edge. Those located on the wall shall have the top of the detector at least 100 mm (4 inch) and not more than 300 mm (12 inches) below the




ceiling. On smooth ceilings, detectors shall be installed not over 9.1 meters (30 feet) apart in any direction. Closer spacing shall be used when recommended by the detector manufacturer or required by NFPA 72. Install smoke detectors no closer than 1.5 meters (5 feet) from air handling supply outlets.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Installation and location of duct detectors shall be in accordance

with NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, manufacturer’s requirements. and the following:

1. Duct detectors in supply systems shall be located downstream of fans, filters, humidifiers, etc. Locate a minimum of three (3) meters (10 feet) downstream of humidifiers.

2. Duct smoke detectors shall be mounted outside ducts and utilize sampling tubes

to sample air. 3. Position holes or openings located along the length of the sampling tube into the

air flow. Secure tube position with locking means provided (A tube visual indicator should be provided to indicate the tube hole location without dismantling the duct installation).

4. Sampling tube end shall be plugged with an air stopper. 5. The duct smoke detector enclosure and sampling tubes shall be mounted rigidly

to prevent noise chatter and mechanical fatigue. 6. If duct sampling tube protrudes through opposite side of duct, the opening around

the tube on the outside of the duct shall be sealed with duct sealant.

E. All fire alarm systems shall have at least one (1) annunciator located in plain view within 7.6 meters (25 feet) from of the primary fire department entrance to the building. Flush mount the panel; with the top of the panel 1.8 meters (6 feet) above the finished floor or center the panel at 1.6 meters (5.25 feet), whichever is lower.

F. Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches: Locate water flow detectors and tamper

switches where shown on the drawings at each supervised sprinkler valve station.

G. Terminal Cabinets, NAC Power Supplies, and auxiliary fire alarm panels: Locate the panel or cabinet with the top of the panel 1.8 meters (6 feet) above the finished floor. Do not locate these panels above ceilings or where inaccessible by a person standing on the finished floor of the space.

H. Outside Locations: All devices installed where subject to conditions of the outdoors or

extreme humidity, including backboxes and fittings, shall meet the temperature, humidity performance and limitations prescribed in NFPA 72, be specifically UL listed for such applications and be marked accordingly.

3.4 COORDINATION OF WORK




A. The Contractor shall coordinate this fire alarm system work with other trades to avoid conflicts, assure system completion and testing within the project schedule and to assure a quality, workmanlike finished product. In occupied buildings the Contractor shall coordinate all work with the GSA Property Manager to limit the disruptions to government business and activities. This may mean altered scheduling, after hours work, and/or sequencing construction activities to avoid disruptions to occupants of the building.

3.5 ADRESSABLE DEVICE LABELING

A. Each addressable device shall be labeled with permanent labels indicating the device’s digital address. Labels shall have 12 mm (½ inch) letters with the following color scheme: red devices shall have red letters on a white background; devices of other colors shall have black letters on a white or clear background providing adequate contrast so as to be read easily. Ceiling mounted devices shall be labeled on two sides of the base. Labels shall be in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Manual pull stations shall have a 12 mm (½ inch) label stating the digital address

of the device. Mount label at top of pull station. 2. Detector bases shall be labeled on two sides with 12 mm (½ inch) labels so

persons traversing corridors or spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it.

3. Duct detector housing and remote indicator shall be labeled with 12 mm (½ inch) labels so persons traversing spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it.

4. Addressable Interface Devices shall be labeled with 12 mm (½ inch) labels with each device’s digital address.

3.6 TESTS

A. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. Measure resistance of circuit with no devices installed. The tests shall be witnessed by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

B. Loop Capacitance Tests: Measure and record the capacitance of each signaling line

circuit. Measure capacitance between +loop and –loop, between +loop and shield or conduit, and between –loop and shield and conduit. Measure capacitance of circuit with no devices installed. The tests shall be witnessed by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.

C. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that all devices and circuits are

functioning properly. Tests shall meet the requirements of Section 3.8 of this section. Correct any deficiencies, omissions or anomalies and retest the affected devices to assure proper function per the specification.

1. Date and time of each test.




2. Reference set of contractor record drawings numerically identifying the individual components and circuits tested, test locations, and indication of the sound level in each room and corridor.

3. A description of each test performed. 4. Checklist of each device and circuit tested with result of each test. 5. The names and signatures of the individuals conducting and witnessing each test.

After all preliminary testing is complete; provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter shall state that each initiating and notification device was tested in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state that all panel functions were tested and operated properly. The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments.

D. Final Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final

acceptance testing. Submit request for test at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the test date. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the O&M Manuals are provided to and approved by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer, the preliminary test certification letter is received by the GSA Fire Protection Engineer, and the following are provided at the job site:

1. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually installed 2. Loop resistance test results and loop capacitance test results 3. Complete program printout including all input/output addresses

The contractor shall coordinate that representatives of all installing contractors, manufacturers, designers, GSA associates, and tenants necessary to perform any and all testing are present for the final acceptance testing. Any delays or additional costs in testing or repeated testing necessary to complete this requirement because representatives were not on site for testing shall not be the responsibility of the Government.

The GSA Fire Protection Engineer shall witness the final tests. At this time, any and all tests required to confirm system operation in compliance with the contract documents shall be repeated at the discretion of the Government. Should the fire alarm system or any of its components or interfaces thereto not operate as required, the GSA Fire Protection Engineer may cancel the final test and require the final test to be repeated when deficiencies are resolved to the satisfaction of the GSA Fire Protection Engineer. Any such repeated tests as required by the Government shall be done at no additional expense to the Government. Repeated testing expenses shall be borne by the contractor and shall include but not be limited to, contractor’s direct and indirect expenses for repeating the testing, travel and professional expenses for project Architects and Engineers related to final acceptance testing, travel and professional expenses for GSA fire protection engineers, technicians, contracting officers, contracting officer’s representatives, project managers and property managers and any other expense necessary to repeat final acceptance testing as required by this contract.

E. The contractor shall perform all testing in occupied facilities at times of day that present

the lowest impact and disruption to government business and activities. Coordinate all




testing in occupied buildings with the Property Manager to assure that fire alarm system testing does not interrupt government operations. This may require extensive after hours work to perform such testing.

F. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, tools, meters, ladders, and

communication devices necessary for the performance of all tests. Materials such as simulated smoke, heat-producing devices for heat detectors, extension poles for introducing smoke into detectors, etc shall be provided entirely by the Contractor. The GSA Fire Protection Engineer may confirm sound levels and air velocities with Government furnished equipment. The Contractor shall provide communications devices for Government representatives observing the testing so that they may communicate with the members of the testing team.

G. The contractor shall not use open flame, burning materials, smoke bombs, pyrotechnic

devices, or smoking materials at any time to conduct the required tests. Damage done to the facility from improper testing shall be the responsibility of the contractor and shall not be an acceptable reason for schedule delays or additional costs to the government.

H. The Contractor shall provide the GSA Fire Protection Engineer with written certification

that all equipment:

1. Has been inspected and tested by a manufacturer’s certified representative. 2. Is properly installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and

equipment listings. 3. Is in proper working order

4. The contractor shall provide completed and signed Inspection and Testing Forms

as outlined in NFPA 72. 3.8 MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS

A. General: Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72. The required tests are as follows:

1. The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test level with results available

at the final acceptance test.

2. Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual.

3. Test each initiating, signaling and notification device and circuit for proper

operation and response at the control unit (alarm, supervisory and trouble). 4. Measure and record loop resistance of all circuits. Measure and record loop

capacitance of all signaling line circuits. Record the manufacturer’s maximum permitted loop resistance and loop capacitance on the same form.




5. Test sound pressure levels (dBA fast) throughout the building to assure specified decibel levels are achieved by the speakers. Measure sound levels at 1.5 meters (5 feet) above finished floor in each room with the room doors closed. Measure sound pressure levels with a meter that complies with ANSI S1.5a, Type 2 and has been calibrated within one (1) year. Sound pressure levels for each room or area shall be recorded and indicated on the red line drawings.

6. Test the system for all specified functions in accordance with the contract

drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual.

7. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify by test that the secondary

power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified.

8. Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified. 9. Visually inspect all wiring. 10. Test the battery charger and batteries. 11. Verify that all software control and data files have been entered or programmed

into the FACP. Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.

12. Verify that redline drawings are accurate. 13. Measure the current in circuits to assure there is the calculated spare capacity for

the circuits. 14. Measure voltage at the end of the notification circuits to assure that voltage drop

is not excessive. 15. Disable the verification feature, if provided, for smoke detectors during tests to

minimize the amount of smoke or test gas needed to activate the detector. 16. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance on each notification

appliance circuit. 17. Provide a manometer to measure the pressure differential across duct smoke

detector sampling tubes, to insure adequate air flow. Testing of duct smoke detectors shall include checking sampling and exhaust tubes to verify that there is air flow through duct smoke detectors by measuring the pressure difference between the inlet and outlet tubes using equipment as specified by the manufacturer of the duct smoke detector. Demonstrate adequate air flow at each detector at the time of the test.

18. Test the DACT to as follows:




a. Initiating devices shall be actuated. Receipt of correct initiating device signal at the supervising station within 90 seconds shall be verified. If test jacks are used, the first and last tests shall be made without the use of the test jack.

b. The primary line from the DACT shall be disconnected. Indication of a

trouble signal shall be received at the premises & supervising station within four (4) minutes of detection of the fault.

c. The secondary line from the DACT shall be disconnected. Indication of

a trouble signal shall be received at the premises & supervising station within 4 minutes of detection of the fault.

d. The DACT shall be caused to transmit a signal to the DACR (receiver)

while a fault in the primary telephone number is simulated. Utilization of the secondary telephone number by the DACT to complete the transmission to the DACR shall be verified

19. Verify correct labeling of annunciation and correct receipt of alarm, supervisory

and trouble signals for each circuit. 3.9 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

A. Interchangeable Parts: All spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall be delivered to the GSA Contracting Officer’s Representative.

B. Spare Parts: Provide the following spare parts and accessories:

2 Combination speaker/strobe appliances 2 Independent Speaker appliances 2 Independent strobe appliances 2 Fuses for each fused circuit 2 Manual fire alarm stations 2 Area smoke detectors with bases 4 Monitor modules 4 Control modules 2 Auxiliary relays

C. Parts List: Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and accessories that the

manufacturer of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance. 3.10 KEYS

A. General: Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identical. Provide not less than six keys of each type required.




3.11 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. General: Provide installation, operation and maintenance manuals not less than fifteen days prior to the final acceptance testing of the entire system. Provide complete installation manuals for the system installed. The manuals shall be used during the instruction period hereinafter specified. Provide six (6) bound copies of an Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual. The manual shall include an index, copies of all approved shop drawings and submittal materials, and a complete parts list of all components. The manual shall also include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the serial number of the part, an ordering number, if appropriate, and a physical and electrical description of the part. Following the final acceptance test, all copies of the drawings and submittal materials shall be updated as necessary to reflect as-built conditions.

3.12 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES

A. Instructor: Provide the services of an instructor, who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection, testing and maintenance of the system provided. The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care, adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire detection and alarm system.

B. Qualifications: Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this

installation. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical operation and maintenance work.

C. Required Instruction Time: After consulting with the GSA Fire Protection Engineer &

GSA Property Manager to determine the training needs for the building personnel provide eight (8) hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system. The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer. The instruction may be divided into two (2) or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

D. The Contractor shall submit a proposed training agenda for review and approval by the

Contracting Officer within sixty (60) days of the authorization to proceed. The final, approved training agenda shall be submitted fourteen (14) days prior to the final system acceptance test. Topics shall include:

1. Alarm acknowledgement 2. System reset 3. Basic troubleshooting 4. Replacement of paper and ribbons in all printers 5. Bypass of individual devices or groups of devices 6. History printout 7. Detector sensitivity printout 8. Detector sensitivity change or environmental adjustments

E. The contractor shall videotape (in color), all fire alarm system training sessions on one

(1) VHS tape or DVD. Within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of all training sessions, the contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer (CO) with an edited




“draft” version of the recorded training sessions that includes as a minimum the two (2) parts as specified below. GSA will review the videotape or DVD and provide Contractor with review comments. Within seven (7) calendar days from receipt of GSA’s comments, the Contractor shall provide the Contracting Officer with two first generation edited final versions of the recorded training session.

The video should begin by showing two (2) slides (white background with a block style font in black), the first indicating the building name, location, project title and number, date of video production, etc. and the second slide clearly identifying the Fire Alarm/Voice communication system manufacturer, model number(s) as appropriate, and what part of video presentation (Part 1 or 2).

1. Part 1: This part shall be designed as a general overview of the building’s Fire

Alarm system basic operations. This portion of the video would primarily be for building personnel “First Responders” who are arriving at the main Fire Alarm panel during the early stages of an incident; these persons may include the Property Manager(s), building security staff/guards, and/or building operating engineers.

a. The contractor shall provide the information found in the contract-

required framed printed operating instructions next to each panel and shall provide clear instructions on actions to take upon receiving a fire alarm, supervisory alarm, or trouble signal; i.e. how to acknowledge, reset, silence building alarms, silence local panel alarms, etc.

b. The contractor shall provide instruction on how the system would

automatically respond based on the various types of devices installed throughout the building such as, but not necessarily limited to: manual pull stations, waterflow switches, elevator lobby and machine room smoke detectors, HVAC in-duct smoke detectors, Kitchen hood extinguishing systems, sprinkler control valve tamper switches, fire pump monitoring signals, etc.

c. The contractor shall provide instruction on how the voice communication

system operates and how it is incorporated into the Fire Alarm system. Also, provide information on the various procedures to take and the system capabilities related to making manual voice paging announcements: all-call, selective areas (floors), overriding automatic messages, etc.

d. The contractor shall provide instruction on the proper use and

capabilities of the fire alarm system printer and how to use the information provided via this printer.

e. The contractor shall provide instruction on the proper use and

capabilities of the firefighter’s phone system.

f. The contractor shall provide instruction on how the Video Display Unit and any touch screen or other software driven display works and the




capabilities of these features. Videotaping shall show how to operate the video display unit and show changes in displays based upon receipt of signals. It shall also show specifically how to locate devices in alarm, supervisory or trouble conditions.

2. Part 2: This part would be designed as a more thorough, in-depth training module.

This portion of the video would primarily be for building operating engineers/technicians. Please provide a title slide indicating “Part 2”, and the intended audience.

a. The contractor shall provide instruction of the override/bypass switches which are programmed into the panel (elevator recall bypass, HVAC shutdown bypass, etc.) and how to activate and deactivate such switches.

b. The contractor shall provide a thorough description of the LCD display

touch screen system and how to navigate through the various built-in menus. Also, provide instruction on how to print reports and other capabilities of the LCD display screen system.

c. The contractor shall provide a general description of when a qualified

fire alarm system technician needs to be called in order to perform repair/diagnosis of problems not easily remedied by in-house personnel.

d. The contractor shall provide instruction on the type of periodic required

maintenance/testing that needs to be performed on the system by qualified personnel.

e. The contractor shall provide a brief overview of the contractor-provided

operation and maintenance manuals and how the building personnel should be using these materials.

The video should conclude by showing a slide (white background with a block style black font) indicating “THE END”.

3.13 DOCUMENTATION A. As-Built Drawings

1. Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer six (6) sets of detailed "As Built Drawings." The drawings shall provide the installed representation of all equipment in the format required for submittal shop drawings as a minimum. In addition, the drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of all devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as installed, including all wiring and conduit runs, and all deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 762 mm by 1067mm (30 inch x 42 inch). These drawings shall be submitted within two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system.




2. Provide three (3) sets of all As-Built CAD based electronic drawings; each set

shall include DWG and DWF file formats, including all associated externally referenced electronic files (Xref’s). These As-Built electronic files shall contain externally referenced files that have been inserted (do not Bind the Xref’s). Provide both DWG and DWF file formats on three (3) separate recordable CD-R’s (do not use CD-RW’s or DVD-R/RW’s). These three (3) CD-R’s shall be formatted, written to, and the recording session closed in such a manner as to prevent additional electronic file transfers to the recordable CD-R’s. Refer to Division 1 for any additional requirements.

B. Permanent Records

1. Provide a record copy of the site specific software.
